2007 honda ridgeline online reference owner's manual...

2007 Honda Ridgeline Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction .........................................................................................................................................i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................iii

Your Vehicle at a Glance .....................................................................................................................3 Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 57 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 121 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 177What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 193 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 233 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 273 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 299ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 311A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 315 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index...................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Accord Value Package Audio System

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Ridgeline. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SJCC10

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Honda Ridgeline was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Date RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices recordfront seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag systemcomponent. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally requiredor with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked tothe vehicle owner.

Introduction

WARNING:

ii

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention ActThe airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perchlorate materials - special handlingmay apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

－

－－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

These signal words mean:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

InstructionsSafety Section

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher groundclearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. Your vehicle also has a shorterwheelbase, allowing it to respond quicker to the steering wheel than other sport utility vehicles with a longerwheelbase.

In addition to these characteristics, your vehicle’s pickup bed area allows you to carry more cargo and has the dual-action tailgate to handle the items easily.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.

Overloading or improperly loading cargo could affect your handling and the vehicle’s stability, and could result in acrash. Make sure the cargo is properly loaded and all items are secured in the pickup bed area.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and thesection on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of

control or an accident.

194227Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Important Handling Information

iv

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED: If equipped

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

GLOVE BOX

AUDIO SYSTEM

MIRROR CONTROLS

CENTER CONSOLE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAGGAUGES

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

(P.9, 23) (P.9, 23)

PARKING BRAKERELEASE HANDLE

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

AUXILIARY INPUTJACK

REAR VIEW MIRROR WITHCOMPASS

(P.59)(P.70)

(P.109)

(P.111)

(P.83)

(P.105)

(P.109)(P.113) (P.116)

(P.115)

(P.128)

(P.122)

(P.161)

(P.133)

(P.168)PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG

(P.181)

(P.179)

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.If equipped.

1 :2 :3 :

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

VTM-4 LOCK

SEAT HEATERS

CRUISE CONTROLS


INTERIOR LIGHTCONTROL SWITCH

HORN

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

(P.76)

(P.161)

(P.78)

(P.104)

(P.118)

(P.165)

(P.79)

RESET BUTTON

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.29)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P.79)

SELECT BUTTON(P.70)

(P.70)

VOICE CONTROLSWITCHES

MOONROOF SWITCH INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

SHIFT LEVER(P.108)

MULTI-CONTROL LEVER(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS)(P.75)

BED LIGHT SWITCH(P.120)

HEADLIGHT CONTROLDIAL

CRUISE BUTTON(P.165)

(P.197)

(P.203)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFF SWITCH(P.211)

2

1

2 3

2

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 15.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 18

..Seat Belt System Components . 18......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 21......Airbag System Components . 21

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 23

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26How your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 28..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29

.............................Airbag Service . 30...Additional Safety Precautions . 31

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 32

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 32

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 33

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 33

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 35

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 35

...Additional Safety Precautions . 36Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 37.......................Protecting Infants . 37

.........Protecting Small Children . 38.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 39....................Installing a Child Seat . 40

...............................With LATCH . 41.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44

..............................With a Tether . 46...........Protecting Larger Children . 49

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 49..................Using a Booster Seat . 50

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 51

...Additional Safety Precautions . 52.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53

...................................Safety Labels . 54

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengeralways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

14

32 52

235

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Control Your Speed

Important Safety Precautions

6

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(7) (9) (1)

(2)(6)

(10)

(8)(5)

(2)

(11)(4)(3)(10)

(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(9) Door Locks(10) Side Airbags(11) Side Curtain Airbags

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

The pickup bed is not equipped withseats or seat belts. Do not let anyoneride in the pickup bed as they caneasily be thrown out and be killed orseriously injured.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side and rear impacts, androllovers.


Seat Belts Why Wear Seat Belts

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Allowing passengers to ride inthe pickup bed or on the tailgatecan result in death or seriousinjury in a crash.

Make sure all passengers ridein a seat and wear a seat beltproperly.

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact (seepage for more information on howyour side airbags work).

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

23

26

CONTINUED


Airbags

What you should do:

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Your vehicle has side curtain airbagsto help protect the heads of thedriver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact or rollover (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

28


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

10

－

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked. Before driving, be surethe tailgate is also closed.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate open monitor on

the instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door or the tailgate isnot tightly closed.

Your vehicle also has anIn-Bed Trunk open

indicator to show when the In-BedTrunk lid is not tightly closed (seepage ).

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doorand tailgate open monitor works.

32 52

96

8364

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Adjust the Front Seats

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked into position. See page

for how to adjust the front seats.98

On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the center head restraint isadjusted to its highest position.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

See pages and for how toadjust the seat-backs.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.98 102100


Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.


14

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

CONTINUED

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

18


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

RELEASEBUTTONS

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Advice for Pregnant Women


16

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

If they do, they could be veryseriously injured in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe killed or very seriously injuredin a crash.

They could bekilled or injured in a crash, orbecome ill or even die from carbonmonoxide poisoning if engineexhaust enters the cap.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other solid objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.


Additional Safety PrecautionsNever let passengers ride in thearea in front of a folded-up rearseat.

Never let passengers ride in thepickup bed.

Never let passengers ride inside atruck cap (shell).

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach solid objects on ornear a door.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened before

the beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any objects hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

Any object on the floor that istouching the rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

2625

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

18

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallockable retractor that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

44

14

CONTINUED

Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder Belt


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy, or if a sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over (see page

).

If a side airbag or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

28

261

do not deploy

HondaWarranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance


20

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

23

26

26

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

(15)

(16)

(15)

(8)

(12)

(1)

(3)

(5)

(6)

(4)

(14)

(7)

(14)

(4)(5)

(10)

(11)

(13)(2)

(7)

(9)

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(12) SRS Indicator(13) Side Curtain Airbags(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(16) Roll Rate Sensor

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact,side impact, or rollover.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and a frontpassenger’s seat belt is latched orunlatched (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

A rollover sensor that can detect ifyour vehicle is about to roll overand signal the control unit todeploy both side curtain airbagsand front seat belt tensioners (seepage ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

19

27

18

25

25

28

28

29

29


22

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).25

CONTINUED

How Your Front Airbags Work


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will deploy at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched

latched


24

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.


Advanced Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

29

261


How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

26

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if sensors inthe seat detect a child has leanedinto the side airbag’s deploymentpath, the airbag will shut off.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

29


Side Airbag Cutoff System

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

A rollover sensor monitors thedegree and rate your vehicle may rollover and automatically deploy theside curtain airbags and activate thefront seat belt tensioners (see page

).

In a rollover toward the frontpassenger’s side of the vehicle, bothside curtain airbags will inflate andthe front seat belt tensioners willactivate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

19


How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

In a Side Impact

In a Rollover

28

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them. This indicator

alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

62

CONTINUED


How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

not mean

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

U.S. Canada

Canada

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object, hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Any object that is touching therear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.


Airbag Service

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

30

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during the crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

－

－－

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

37 4849 52

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

32

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Children who ride in the back areless likely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children aged 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

29

49

CONTINUED


Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.


Canadian Models

U.S. Models

34

SUN VISORS DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see pages and

).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).14

49

98

15

100

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

－

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


Children who play in vehiclescan accidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency In-BedTrunk opener and decide if yourchildren should be shown how touse this feature (see page ).

Opening orclosing the tailgate could causeaccidental injuries.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the windows,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

If a child wraps a loose

seat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

96

44 45

84

Additional Safety Precautions


Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Lock all doors and the In-BedTrunk when your vehicle is not inuse.

Teach your children not to play onthe pickup bed.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

36

CONTINUED

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It can also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

38

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into each rear seatingposition in the back seat.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

1.

2.

41

29

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

40

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

When using the tether strap onthe child seat, attach the tetherstrap hook to the center tetheranchor before installing the childseat to the lower anchors for theLATCH system, because thecenter tether anchor is positionedbehind the child seat.

If needed, move the seat beltbuckle or tongue away from thelower anchors.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the rear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Whenever using the center tetheranchor point, make sure to pushdown the head restraint to the lowestposition, route the strap over theseat-back, then around the upperguide before attaching the tetherstrap hook to the center tetheranchor (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

46

CONTINUED

On the center seating position


Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

BUTTON UPPER GUIDE

CENTER TETHER ANCHOR

LATCHANCHORPOINTS

Make sure the head restraint is inthe lowest position. Lift the cover,then route the tether strap aroundthe upper guide. Route the tetherstrap downward properly, makingsure the strap is not twisted, thenattach the strap hook to the centertether anchor.

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

5.

4.


42

Flexible typeRigid type

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

over the seat-back and throughthe head restraint legs.Lift the cover, then route thetether strap around the upperguide. Route the tether strapdownward properly, making surethe strap is not twisted, thenattach the strap hook to the tetheranchor on the outside of the seatbottom (see page ).

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

6. 7.

8.102

46

On the outer seating position


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

UPPER GUIDE

Outer Position

UPPER GUIDE

Center Position TETHER ANCHORTETHER ANCHOR

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

If you place the child seat in the rearcenter seating position and use thetether strap for additional security,make sure to push down the headrestraint to the lowest position andhook the tether strap hook to theanchor before securing the child seatwith the lap/shoulder belt. Refer topage for how to route the tetherstrap properly.

1. 2.

3.

46

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


44

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

4. 5.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

When using a tether anchor, alwayshook the tether strap through theupper guide to route it properly.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Each outer seating position has atether anchor at the outside of theseat bottom. The center seatingposition has a tether anchor betweenthe lower anchors for the LATCH-compatible child seat. Each anchorpoint is shown above.

Lift the cover, then hook thetether strap through the upperguide as shown.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat.

1.

2.

44


Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Using an Outer Tether Anchor

46

COVER

UPPERGUIDE

UPPER GUIDECENTERTETHERANCHOR

OUTERTETHERANCHOR

OUTER TETHER ANCHOR

Route the tether strap downwardproperly, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to theouter tether anchor on the outsideof the seat bottom.

Make sure to attach the tether straphook to the anchor before installingthe child seat, because the tetheranchor is positioned behind the childseat.

Place the child seat on the rearseat.

Push down the rear center headrestraint to the lowest position.

Route the tether strap over theseat-back, lift the cover, then hookthe tether strap through the upperguide as shown.

Route the tether strap downwardproperly along the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

3.

4.

CONTINUED


Using the Center Tether Anchor

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

UPPER GUIDE


Attach the tether strap hook to thecenter tether anchor between thelower anchors for the LATCH-compatible child seat.

Properly secure the child seat (seepage ), then tighten the tetherstrap according to the seat maker’sinstructions.

Whenever using the tether strap,make sure to route the strap throughthe upper guide before attaching thetether strap hook to the tetheranchor. If the tether strap is notrouted properly and secured, thechild seat may not be secured. Thiscould lead to serious injury or death.

5.

6.44


48

UPPER GUIDE


The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

3.

4.

5.

39


Using a Booster Seat

50

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Supervise the child. Even a maturechild sometimes needs to bereminded to fasten the seat belt orsit properly.

14 49

Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

52

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

With a truck cap installed and theback window open, engine exhaustmay enter the vehicle and cause ahazardous condition. Keep the backwindow tightly closed whenever youdrive with a truck cap installed.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

54

RADIATOR CAP

DASHBOARD

SUN VISOR

SUN VISORS

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Canadian modelsU.S. models

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

55

HOOD DOORJAMBS

PICKUP BED

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 58............................Instrument Panel . 59

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 61.............................................Gauges . 70

Controls Near the Steering...........................................Wheel . 74

........................Multi-Control Lever . 75...................Headlight Control Dial . 76

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 78.................Hazard Warning Button . 79

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 79..................................................Keys . 80

........................Immobilizer System . 81................................Ignition Switch . 82

......................................Door Locks . 83.......................Remote Transmitter . 89.......................Dual-Action Tailgate . 92

...............................In-Bed Trunk . 95.................................................Seats . 98

..................................Seat Heaters . 104............................Power Windows . 105

.......................................Moonroof . 108...............................Parking Brake . 109

...........................................Mirrors . 110

.........Interior Convenience Items . 112.........................Center Console . 113

.......Console Compartments . 113.........................Cargo Hooks . 114

.....................Beverage Holders . 114..................................Glove Box . 115................................Coat Hooks . 115

....................Sunglasses Holder . 115........Accessory Power Sockets . 116

...................................Sun Visor . 117............................Vanity Mirror . 117

...............................Interior Lights . 118.....................................Bed Lights . 120

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

57

TM

＊

＊

＊

If equipped

Control Locations

58

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

GLOVE BOX

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

CENTER CONSOLE

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS


CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

PARKING BRAKERELEASE HANDLE

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

AUXILIARY INPUTJACK

REAR VIEW MIRROR WITHCOMPASS(P.59)

(P.70)

(P.109)

(P.111)

(P.83)

(P.105)

(P.109) (P.113) (P.116)

(P.115)

(P.128)

(P.122)

(P.161)

(P.133)(P.168)

(P.179)

(P.181)

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

U.S. models

59

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

WASHER LEVELINDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

VTM-4 INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

TPMS INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

BACK WINDOW OPENINDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINTSYSTEMINDICATOR

SEAT BELTREMINDERINDICATOR

BED LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

IN-BED TRUNK OPENINDICATOR

(P.67)

(P.66)

(P.66)

(P.66)

(P.68)

(P.69)

(P.62)

(P.63)

(P.62)

(P.62)

(P.69)

(P.67)

(P.68)

(P.67)

(P.62)

(P.63)

(P.65)

(P.62)

(P.61)

(P.65)

(P.65)

(P.63)

(P.69)

(P.64)

(P.65)

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN MONITORTIRE PRESSURE MONITOR(P.68)

Instrument Panel

Canadian models

60

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

WASHER LEVELINDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

VTM-4 INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

TPMS INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

BACK WINDOW OPENINDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR


ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINTSYSTEMINDICATOR

SEAT BELTREMINDERINDICATOR

DAY TIME RUNNING LIGHTSINDICATOR

BED LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

IN-BED TRUNK OPENINDICATOR

(P.67)

(P.66)

(P.66)

(P.65)

(P.66)

(P.68)

(P.69)

(P.62)

(P.63)

(P.62)

(P.62)

(P.69)

(P.64)

(P.69)

(P.67)

(P.68)

(P.67)

(P.62)

(P.63)

(P.65)

(P.62)

(P.61)

(P.65)

(P.65)

(P.63)

(P.65)

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN MONITORTIRE PRESSURE MONITOR(P.68)

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you

turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .18

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

a problem. For more information, seepage 289.

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’ s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’ sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’ s seat positionsensor, and the front passenger’ sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

29

28

288

288

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator Side Airbag Off

Indicator


62

U.S. Canada

If this indicator comes on while driving, it means one of the engine’semissions control systems may have

This indicator has two functions:

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. With theindicator on, your vehicle still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock brakes. For more information,see page .

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willgo off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink and the enginewill not start (see page ).

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

1.

2.

81

290

208

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicatorParking Brake

and BrakeSystemIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

U.S. Canada

This monitor includes two functions;the door open indicator and thetailgate open indicator. This monitorworks with the ignition switch in anyposition.

The specific door indicator comes onin this monitor if any door is notclosed tightly.

The tailgate indicator comes onwhen the tailgate is swung open or ifit is not closed completely after youswing it closed.

If the tailgate is swung open or is notclosed tightly, you will hear six beepsand see the indicator blinking whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. The beeper alsosounds and the indicator blinks whenyou move the shift lever out of thePark or neutral position.

The tailgate open indicator does notmonitor the tailgate when it isdropped open.

If the driver does not fasten the seatbelt and the tailgate is swung open,the seat belt reminder alarm willsound at first, then the tailgate openreminder beeper will sound.For more information on the tailgate,see page .

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

94

256 257

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Door and Tailgate Open Monitor


64

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position with the headlightswitch off and the parking brake set.It should go off when you turn on theheadlights or release the parkingbrake. If it comes on at any othertime, it means there is a problemwith the DRL. There may also be aproblem with the high beamheadlights.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator is located in the fuelgauge. It comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the daytime running lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicator(see page ).

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 3.30 U.S. gal (12.5 ) of fuelremaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

78

165

250

76

Canadian models only

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

The main switch can be left on, even when the system is not in use.

NOTE:

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid. It should come onfor a few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it means the transmission fluidtemperature is too high. Pull to theside of the road when it is safe, shiftto Park, and let the engine idle untilthe indicator goes out.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem in the 4WDsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer to have it checked.

If the indicator blinks while driving,the VTM-4 fluid temperature is toohigh. Pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, shift to Park, and letthe engine idle until the indicatorgoes out.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen you turn the headlight controldial to either the or

position.

If you turn the ignition switch toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)without turning off the headlightcontrol dial, this indicator remains on.A reminder chime will also soundwhen you open the driver’s door.

Lights On Indicator A/T TemperatureIndicator

VTM-4 Indicator


66

Continuing to drive with the A/Ttemperature indicator on may causeserious damage to the transmission.

Continuing to drive with the VTM-4indicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance. Themaintenance main items and subitems will be displayed in theinformation display. See page formore information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

This indicator has three functions:

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

1.

2.

3.210

210

210

235

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Maintenance MinderIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

it indicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure on the tirepressure monitor, and determine thecause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). Refer to page

for more information.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator and the tirepressure monitor will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

This monitor normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. While driving, theappropriate tire indicator will comeon, along with the low tire pressureindicator, if a tire is extremelyunderinflated or has suddenly lostpressure. See

for what to do if thisindicator comes on.

274

296204

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitor



68

This indicator reminds you that thebed lights are on. With the shift leverin the Park position, they come onwhen you push the light switch onthe dashboard, swing open thetailgate, or open the In-Bed Trunk.

This indicator reminds you that theIn-Bed Trunk is open. If you do notclose it, the indicator stays on forabout 3 minutes. See page formore information.

This indicator reminds you that theback window is not completelyclosed when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK(0) position. With the ignition switchin the ACCESSORY (I) position, itgoes off after about 30 seconds. Withthe ignition switch in the LOCK (0)position, it goes off after about 3minutes.

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position without turning off the bedlights, this indicator will remain on,and then go off after 20 minutes. Seepage for more information. If you remove the ignition key, turn

off the lights, and open the driver’sdoor without closing the backwindow, you will hear five beeps andsee the indicator blink. If you do notclose the back window before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsblinking but remains on. It will go offafter about 3 minutes. See page

for more information.

120

95

106

Back Window OpenIndicator

Bed Lights On Indicator In-Bed Trunk OpenIndicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

To switch the information displaybetween the odometer, trip meterand outside temperature (ifequipped), and engine oil life andmaintenance service items, press theSELECT button repeatedly.

This shows the total distance yourvehicle has been driven. It measuresmiles in U.S. models and kilometersin Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

Odometer

Gauges

70

SPEEDOMETERTACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE

FUEL GAUGE

SELECTBUTTON

TRIP METER RESETBUTTON

OUTSIDETEMPERATUREINDICATOR

U.S. model is shown.

INFORMATIONDISPLAY

ODOMETER/TIGHTEN FUELCAP MESSAGE

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: TRIP Aand TRIP B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the SELECTbutton repeatedly. Each trip meterworks independently, so you cankeep track of two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’. Both trip meters will reset ifthe vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. And both continue totrack mileage, even when only one isdisplayed.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the meter youlast selected is displayed.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

Trip Meter Fuel Gauge

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

SELECT BUTTON

RESET BUTTON

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

± ±

－－－－－－－－

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels).

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the indicatorupdate until it reaches the correctoutside temperature. This may takeseveral minutes.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C inCanadian models) warmer or cooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

To adjust the outside temperatureindicator, make sure the outsidetemperature indicator is shown inthe display, then press and hold theRESET button for 10 seconds (theTRIP A or B is also reset). Thefollowing sequence will appear for 1second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4,

3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

When it reaches the desired value,release the RESET button. Youshould see the new outsidetemperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem, see page .286

If equippedTemperature Gauge Outside Temperature Indicator

Gauges

72

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

If your fuel fill cap is loose ormissing, a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’message appears on the informationdisplay after you start the engine.Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel cap is installed. If it is, loosen it,then retighten it until it clicks at leastonce. When you restart the engine, the message appears again. The message goes off after several days of normal driving once you tightenor replace the fuel cap. To scroll toanother message, press the selectbutton.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle's evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel capwas not already tightened, turn the engine off, and check or retighten the fuel cap until it clicks at least once. The MIL goes off after several days of normal driving once the cap is tightened or replaced. If the MIL does not go off, have your vehicle inspected

235

Maintenance Minder DisplayTighten Fuel Cap Message

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

by a dealer. For more information, seepage 289.

＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.If equipped.

12

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

74

SHIFT LEVER

CRUISE BUTTON

CRUISECONTROLS

HORN

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

VTM-4 LOCK


BED LIGHT SWITCH

MULTI-CONTROL LEVER(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS)

MOONROOF SWITCH

INTERIOR LIGHTCONTROL SWITCH

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

HEADLIGHT CONTROLDIAL

RESET BUTTON

SELECT BUTTON

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

(P.108)

(P.75)

(P.120)

(P.76)

(P.165)

(P.161)

(P.79) (P.165)(P.118)

(P.78)

(P.70)

(P.70)

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.29)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P.79)

SEAT HEATERS(P.104)

(P.203)

(P.211)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

(P.197)

1

2

2

2

－

－

OFFINT: IntermittentINT TIME ringLO: Low speedHI: High speedMISTWindshield washer (spray nozzles)Turn signalHigh beamsFlash high beams

The multi-control lever has manyfunctions, including windshieldwipers and washers, turn signals,headlight high beams, and headlighthigh beam flashing.

To select a position, turn the rotaryswitch, push the button on the end ofthe lever, or push the lever up, down,forward, or backward.

The wipers are not activated.

The length of the wiperinterval is variedautomatically according to thevehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning theINT TIME ring. If you turn itto the shortest delay, thewipers change to low speedwhen the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

The wipers run at high speeduntil you release the lever.

Push thebutton on the end of themulti-control lever. Thewashers spray until yourelease the button. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweepafter you release the button.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.

10.

OFF:

INT:

LO

HI

MIST:

Windshield Washer:

Multi-Control Lever

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

－

－

OFFParking and indicator lightsHeadlights

Push down on themulti-control lever to signal a leftturn and up to signal a right turn. Tosignal a lane change, push lightly onthe lever and hold it. The lever willreturn to center when you release itor complete a turn.

To turn on the highbeams, push the multi-control leverforward until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will comeon (see page ). Pull the lever backto return to the low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

Your vehicle has heating wires at thebottom of the windshield to helpheat the wiper blades and thewindshield. If the outsidetemperature is near freezing, theheater turns on automatically whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. The heater turnsoff automatically when the outsidetemperature is above freezing.

This function helps to increase wiperperformance when the wiper armssit in the parked position in snowy oricy conditions.

1.2.3.

65

Headlight Control DialTurn Signal

High Beams

Automatic Heated Wiper Zone

Multi-Control Lever, Headlights

76

－ If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightcontrol dial on, but do not open thedoor, the lights will turn off after 10minutes.

Turning the dial tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, and license plate lights.

Turning the dial to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on and removethe key from the ignition switch, youwill hear a reminder chime when youopen the driver’s door.

When the dial is in the ‘‘ ’’ or‘‘ ’’ position, the lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.This indicator stays on if you leavethe lights on and turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I) orLOCK (0) position.

The automatic lighting off featureturns off the headlights, all otherexterior lights, and the instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door. The lights will turn on again when

you unlock or open the driver’s door.This feature activates if you leavethe headlight control dial in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, removethe key, then open and close thedriver’s door.

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightsgo off. With the driver’s door open,you will hear a lights-on reminderchime.

Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHeadlights

Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

The dial on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of theinstrument panel lights and theconsole compartment light. Turn thedial to adjust the brightness.

With the headlight control dial off,the high beam headlights and thehigh beam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the headlight control dial.

The instrument panel will illuminatewith reduced brightness when youunlock and open the driver’s door.The brightness will increase and goto a normal level when you insert thekey in the ignition switch.

If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver’s door, the illumination turnsoff about 30 seconds after you closethe door.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

The instrument panel brightness isdimmed when you turn the headlightcontrol dial to the ‘‘ ’’ or‘‘ ’’ position to reduce glare atnight. To cancel it, turn theinstrument panel brightness controldial upward fully until you hear aclick.

Canadian models onlyInstrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness

78

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS CONTROL DIAL

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Move the steering wheel so itpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and indicators.

Push the lever on the left side ofthe steering column all the waydown.

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and both turnindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

3.

4.1.

2.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentHazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning Button, Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock. You can keep the glovebox locked when you leave yourvehicle and the valet key at a parkingfacility.

You can also keep the In-Bed Trunklocked by using the main switch inthe glove box (see page ).

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

97

Keys

80

VALET KEY(LIGHT GRAY)

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

KEYNUMBERTAG

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go off. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The shift lever must be in Park (P)before you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch

82

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab down, and close the door.To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, andpush the lock tab down, or push thefront of the master switch, thenclose the door.

With the driver’ s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches will not lock, but theywill unlock. The lock feature is notdisabled if the driver’s door is closed.Pushing the front of the switch on theopen passenger’s door will lock alldoors and the In-Bed Trunk.

The lock tab on each door locks andunlocks that door. Pulling up on thedriver’s door lock tab only unlocksthe driver’s door. To unlock thedriver’s door and the In-Bed Trunkfrom the outside, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn it again, all thedoors unlock.

You can open or close the sidewindows by using the key in thedriver’s door (see page ).

To lock all doors and the In-BedTrunk (the tailgate does not lock),push the front of the master door lockswitch on either front door, press thelock tab down on the driver’ s door, oruse the key on the outside lock on thedriver’ s door.

This vehicle has auto door locking/unlocking features. See page forhow to set them.

Pushing the rear of either masterdoor lock switch will unlock all of thedoors and the In-Bed Trunk.

107

84

Lockout Prevention

Power Door Locks

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

LOCK TAB

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors toautomatically lock and unlock. Makeall settings before you start driving.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

Make sure the shift lever is in the Park (P) position.

Apply the parking brake, and close the driver’s door.

With the auto door locking andunlocking, the In-Bed Trunk alsolocks and unlocks (the tailgate does not lock).

The auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:

The doors lock whenever youmove the shift lever out of thePark (P) position.

The doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

1.

2.

Locks all doors when the shift lever ismoved out of Park (P).

Automatic (Auto) Door Locking/Unlocking

Childproof Door Locks

Auto Door Locking

To program the Park Lock mode:

Door Locks

84

LOCK LEVER

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position (do not start the engine).

3.

Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speedreaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’ s door. You will hear aclicking sound, and after about 5seconds, you will hear anotherclicking sound.

Release the switch, and turn the

position within 5 seconds.

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

(II) position (do not start the engine).

Push and hold the brake pedal,then move the shift lever out ofPark (P).

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’ s door. You will hear aclicking sound, and after about 5seconds, you will hear anotherclicking sound.

Release the switch, and turn theignition switch to the


Apply the parking brake, and close the driver’s door.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

6.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

(I)ignition switch to the ACCESSORY

ACCESSORY(I)

7. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).

To program the Drive Lock mode:

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear aclicking sound after about 5seconds.



position within 5 seconds.The driver’ s door and then In-BedTrunk unlocks whenever you movethe shift lever to the PARK (P)position.All doors and the In-Bed trunk unlocks whenever you move the shift lever to the PARK (P) position.

The auto door unlocking feature hasthree modes (Park Unlock, Ignition Switch, and Deactivated), with five possible settings:

The driver’s door and the In-Bed Trunk unlocks whenever you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.All doors and the In-Bed Trunk unlockswhenever you turn the ignition switch totheLOCK (0) position.

The auto door unlocking settingsare deactivated.

Apply the parking brake, and openthe driver’s door.


1.

5.

4.

2.

3.

To turn off the Auto Lock modes: Auto Door Unlocking

Door Locks

86

(I)ACCESSORY

Park Unlock mode:

Ignition Switch mode:

Deactivated:

Make sure the shift lever is inPark (P), and close the driver’sdoor.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear aclicking sound. Continue to holddown the switch:



Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.


Apply the parking brake, and closethe driver’s door.

1.

2.

4.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Unlocks driver’s door or all doors whenthe shift lever is moved to Park (P).

Unlocks driver’ s door or a ll doors whenthe ignition switch is out of the ON (II)position.*

CONTINUED

To program the Park Unlock mode:Unlock mode:

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

position within 5 seconds.(I)ACCESSORY

－

about 5 seconds) toactivate the driver’s door unlockfeature.

(after about 10 seconds) toactivate the all door unlockfeature.

Or, until you hear a third click

－Until you hear a second click(after

To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

＊ If equipped

Apply the parking brake, and open the driver’s door.



Push and hold the brake pedal,then move the shift lever out ofPark (P).

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear aclicking sound. Continue to holddown the switch:

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear aclicking sound, and after about 5seconds, you will hear anotherclicking sound.

4.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4. T o turn off the door unlock modes:

Door Locks

88

－

about 5 seconds) toactivate the driver’s door unlockfeature.

(after about 10 seconds) toactivate the all door unlockfeature.


position within 5 seconds.(I)ACCESSORY

Or, until you hear a third click

－Until you hear a second click(after

6.

7. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).



5.

(I)ACCESSORY

－

－

－

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’ s door and theIn-Bed Trunk. Push it twice to unlockthe remaining doors. If you press the button twice and hold for 3–5 seconds, the side windows will roll down (see page 107).

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights, depending on the interiorlight control switch position, willcome on (see page ). If you donot open any door, the lights stay onfor about 30 seconds, then go out. Ifyou relock the doors and the In-BedTrunk with the remote transmitterbefore 30 seconds have elapsed, thelights will go off immediately.

Press this button once tolock all doors and the In-Bed Trunk.Some exterior and interior lights willflash once.When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a horn toverify that the doors and In-BedTrunk are locked and the securitysystem (if equipped) has set. Thisbutton does not work if any door isnot fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to attractattention; the horn will sound andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Panicmode does not work when the key isin the ignition switch.

If you do not open any door within 30seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock, and the security system sets(if equipped). The UNLOCK buttondoes not work when the key is in theignition switch.

You can also open all side windowsfrom outside the vehicle with theremote transmitter (see page ).107

118

UNLOCK

LOCK

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

Some exterior and interior lights willflash twice each time you push thebutton.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

To replace the battery:

Battery type: CR1616

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

1.

2.

3.

Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

90

SCREW

BATTERY

＋




Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

Install the parts in reverse order.

4.

5.

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

You can open the tailgate twodifferent ways:

Drop it open by using the upperhandle.

Swing it open by using the rightlower handle.

To drop open the tailgate, pull up theupper handle, then pull down thetailgate. To close the tailgate, pushfirmly up until it latches.

Before you open the tailgate adifferent way (dropped open, andthen swung open), make sure it isfully closed.

Make sure all passengers andobjects are clear of the tailgatebefore opening and closing it, andmake sure the tailgate is closedsecurely before driving.

As a safety feature, the upper handleis disabled if you do not fully closethe tailgate after it is swung open.And the lower handle is disabled ifyou do not fully close the tailgateafter it is dropped open.

To Drop Open the Tailgate

Dual-Action Tailgate

92

NOTE:

UPPER HANDLE

To swing open the tailgate, firstmake sure it is fully closed, then pullup the right lower handle, and swingthe tailgate to the left.To close, swing the tailgate back,and push it firmly until it is latched.

The dropped open tailgate can beused as an extended pickup bed.Make sure to secure the items in thepickup bed, and do not exceed themaximum allowable weight on thetailgate (see page ).

To turn the bed lights on or off, usethe bed light switch on thedashboard (see page ).

Before opening or closing thetailgate, check that passengers,especially children, are not in thetailgate’s path.

120

189

CONTINUED

To Swing Open the Tailgate


Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

HANDLESwinging the tailgate open orclosed while anyone is in itspath can cause serious injury.

Make sure all passengers areclear of the tailgate’s pathbefore opening or closing it.

Do not drive with the tailgate swungopen. This could damage the tailgate.

See page for information oncargo loading and weight limits.

You can also store and lock items inthe In-Bed Trunk (see page ).

If you do not fasten the seat belt, youfirst hear the seat belt reminderalarm, then the tailgate reminderbeeper sounds.

The indicator does not monitor thetailgate when it is dropped open.

This indicator is in the door andtailgate open monitor on theinstrument panel. It comes on whenthe tailgate is swung open or it is notcompletely closed. This indicatorworks even if the key is not in theignition switch.

If the tailgate is swung open or notclosed tightly when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position, youwill hear six beeps and see theindicator blinking. The indicatorstays on until you close the tailgate.The beeper also sounds and theindicator blinks when you move theshift lever out of the Park or neutralposition.

Do not allow anyone to hang on theswung open tailgate. This coulddamage the tailgate.

Do not leave the tailgate swung open.The tailgate may swing and shutaccidentally. This could causeserious injuries.

The bed lights come on when youswing open the tailgate. You can alsoturn the bed lights on or off bypushing the bed light switch on thedashboard (see page ).120 95

186Loading Cargo

Tailgate Open Indicator


94

You can open the In-Bed Trunk twodifferent ways:

Push the release button on thelower right side of the In-BedTrunk lid when the driver’s door isunlocked.

To close the In-Bed Trunk, lower thelid, then press down on the backedge.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, therelease button on the In-Bed Trunklid is disabled. To open the In-BedTrunk, use the master key.

Use the master key to open theIn-Bed Trunk when the driver’sdoor is locked.

The bed lights come on when youopen the In-Bed Trunk. You can alsoturn the bed lights on or off bypushing the bed light switch on thedashboard (see page ).

You can store items in the In-BedTrunk up to 300 lbs (136 kg). Do notexceed this weight limit, or you maydamage the In-Bed Trunk. See page

for information on loading cargoand weight limits.

To store items separately in theIn-Bed Trunk, optional dividerguides are available from your dealer.

When the In-Bed Trunk is closedsecurely, it can be locked orunlocked along with the power doorlocks (see page ).83

120

186

CONTINUED

In-Bed Trunk

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

RELEASEBUTTON

TM

To avoid damaging the key and keycylinder of the In-Bed Trunk lid, donot close the tailgate when the key isin the lid.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the latch of theIn-Bed Trunk lid so it can be openedfrom the inside. To open the In-BedTrunk, push the release lever in thedirection of the arrow.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature. For more informationabout child safety, see page .

To avoid damaging the seal on theIn-Bed Trunk lid, remove any debrisfrom the lid’s mating surface beforeyou close it.

To avoid damaging the bottom of theIn-Bed Trunk, do not drive over largeobstacles, and do not use it as ajacking point to raise the vehicle.

To avoid damaging the In-Bed Trunklid, and to prevent items from beingthrown about the vehicle andpossibly hurting someone in anaccident or sudden stop, be sure theIn-Bed Trunk lid is securely closedbefore driving away.

This indicator on the instrumentpanel reminds you that the In-BedTrunk is open (see page ).69

36

Emergency Opener

In-Bed Trunk OpenIndicator

In-Bed Trunk

96

TM

There are two cargo hooks forplastic grocery bags at the back ofthe In-Bed Trunk. They are designedto hold light items. Heavy objectsmay damage the hooks.

To protect items in the In-Bed Trunk,you can disable its release button byturning off the main switch in theglove box and locking the glove boxwith the master key.

Even if the main switch is in the OFFposition, you can open the In-BedTrunk with the master key.

When you are finished washing theIn-Bed Trunk, dry it with a soft cloth,and reinstall the drain plug.

You can wash the inside of theIn-Bed Trunk with a water and milddetergent solution, and a soft brushor cloth.

To drain water from the In-BedTrunk, remove the drain plug byturning it counterclockwise.

Cargo HooksWashing the In-Bed TrunkIn-Bed Trunk Main Switch

In-Bed Trunk

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

DRAIN PLUG

CARGO HOOKSMAIN SWITCH

TM

－

The front passenger’s seat in allmodels adjusts manually.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seat

to make sure it is locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models11 13

Manual Seat Adjustments

Seats

98

Make sure to pull the lever upwardor downward to its full range.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

Vary the lumbar support by movingthe lever on the right side of theseat-back. Move the lever forward orbackward to adjust the lumbarsupport through its full range.

On RTS model


Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Driver’s Manual Lumbar Support

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

－

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

The controls for the poweradjustable driver’s seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the seat with the ignitionswitch in any position. Make all seatadjustments before you start driving.

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat-back angle.

Moves the whole seat upand forward, or downand backward. The frontof the seat also tilts up ordown at the same time.

Moves the front of theseat up or down.

Raises or lowers the seat.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.(RTL and Canadian EXLmodels)

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

11 13

On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXLmodels

Power Seat Adjustments

Seats

100

Make sure your passenger’s handsor fingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to the desired position.

The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seats. Pivot itdown to use it.

Armrests

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

FRONT REAR

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

13

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the center head restraint isproperly positioned.

Head Restraints

Seats

102

RELEASE BUTTON

Rear Center Position

RELEASE BUTTON

The left and right rear seat cushionscan be lifted up separately to makeroom for cargo.

Remove any items from the seatbefore you fold up the seat cushion.

To fold a rear seat cushion, pull upthe lever on the outside of thecushion. The seat cushion pops up,and the seat legs store underneath it.Push the cushion firmly against theseat-back to lock it in place.

To return the seat cushion to itsoriginal position, pull the leveroutward, then push down the seatcushion slowly.

Make sure the seat cushion is lockedsecurely and the seat legs arepositioned properly in the floor guide.

CONTINUED

Folding the Rear Seats

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

LEGS

FLOOR GUIDE

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions when usingthe seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (Seeon page ).

You can also store small items underthe rear seats. Make sure to securethe items so they will not shift whileyou are driving.

Both front seats have seat heaters.The passenger seat is only heated inthe seat bottom because of the sideairbag cutoff system. The ignitionswitch must be in the ON (II)position to use seat heaters. Push thetop of the switch, HI, to rapidly heatup the seat. After the seat reaches acomfortable temperature, select LOby pushing the bottom of the switch.This will keep the seat warm.

186

If equipped

Seat Heaters

Carrying Cargo

Seats, Seat Heaters

104

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

－

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anyside window, or open and close theback window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Pull back on theswitch and hold it to close thewindow.

The windows operate for up to 10minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

To open or close thedriver’s window, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically go upor down all the way. To stop thewindow, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the passenger windows and the backwindow cannot be raised or lowered.

To cancel this feature, push on theswitch again. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

CONTINUED

AUTO

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

BACK WINDOWSWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

－ If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

Your vehicle has a power backwindow.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch from the ON(II) to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK(0) position without closing the backwindow. With the ignition switch inthe ACCESSORY (I) position, theindicator goes off after about 30seconds. With the ignition switch inthe LOCK (0) position, the indicatorgoes off after about 3 minutes.

If the driver’s window fuse isremoved, the AUTO function may bedisabled. The power window systemneeds to be reset after reinstallingthe fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

AUTO REVERSE Back Window

Back Window OpenIndicator

Power Windows

106

To open:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

You can open all of the side windowsfrom the outside with the remotetransmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour side windows start to open.To stop the windows, release thebutton.

You can open and close the sidewindows with the key in the driver’sdoor lock.

The back window is not designed tocarry long items through it. Do notuse the opened back window as acargo area pass-through.

If you remove the ignition key andopen the driver’s door withoutclosing the back window, you hearfive beeps and see the indicator blink.If you do not close the back windowbefore the beeper stops, theindicator stops blinking but remainson. It will go off after about 3minutes (see page ).

To open the windows further,press the button again, withinabout 3 seconds.

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

69

CONTINUED

Opening the Side Windows withthe Remote Transmitter

Opening/Closing the SideWindows with the Key

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

107

Open

Close

UNLOCK BUTTON

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four side windows startto open. To stop the windows,release the key.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can slide back intothe roof. Use the switch near the leftdashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position.

NOTE: If the windows stop beforethe desired position, repeat steps 2and 3.

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

To close:

NOTE: If the windows stop beforethe desired position, repeat steps 2and 3.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All four sidewindows start to close. To stop thewindows, release the key.

1.

2.

3.

4.3.

4.

If equipped

Moonroof

Power Windows, Moonroof

108

MOONROOF SWITCH

You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch.Opening either front door cancelsthis function.

To apply the parking brake, push thepedal down with your foot. Torelease it, pull the release handlefully. The parking brake indicator onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased, and the ignition switch is inthe ON (II) position (see page ).

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center part of theswitch ( ). To close themoonroof, press and hold the upperpart of the switch ( ). To openthe moonroof, press and hold thelower part of the switch ( ).Release the switch when themoonroof gets to the desiredposition.

Make sure everyone’s hands areaway from the moonroof beforeopening or closing it.

63

CONTINUED

Parking Brake

Moonroof, Parking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

109

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

RELEASEHANDLE

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

The rear view mirror has a compassfunction to indicate the vehicle’sdirection.Refer to on page .168

If equippedMirrors

Compass

Parking Brake, Mirrors

110

TABDriving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.


When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

1.

2.

3.

4.

If equipped

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors

Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

111

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

＊

＊

Interior Convenience Items

112

GLOVE BOX

VANITY MIRROR SUN VISOR CENTER CONSOLE

BEVERAGE HOLDER

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

COAT HOOK

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

SUNGLASSESHOLDER

CENTER UPPERPOCKET

CENTER POCKET

CENTER LOWER POCKET BEVERAGE HOLDERS

ACCESSORYPOWERSOCKETS

: On vehicle without navigation system

Your vehicle has a multi-functioncenter console. It includes beverageholders, storage compartments, anarmrest, a coin holder, and a storagetray.

The center console maincompartment is under the tray andthe beverage holder. You can accessthe main compartment in two ways(front or rear).

To open the front of thecompartment, squeeze the knob, andpush it forward while sliding thebeverage holder. To close, squeezethe knob and pull the compartmentbackward until the beverage holderlatches.

To open the rear of the compartment,push the button at the end of thetray, then slide the tray forward. Toclose, slide the tray back in place.

The console compartment lightcomes on when the instrument panellights are on.

There are two removable partitionsin the main compartment. Thepartitions can be used to divide themain compartment, or can be storedat the front of the compartment.

Center Console Console Compartments


Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

You can put small items in the upperconsole compartment. To use it, pullup on the lever and lift up thearmrest.

The upper console compartment hasa removable coin holder. Pull thecoin holder straight up to remove it.To install it, push it down along theguides on the side of thecompartment.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

There are two cargo hooks forplastic grocery bags at the back ofthe center console. They aredesigned to hold light items. Heavyobjects may damage the hooks.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door panel beverageholders when you close the doors.Use only resealable containers in thedoor beverage holders.

The center console has two beverageholders on the front. Your vehiclealso has beverage holders in the rearseat armrest and the rear doorpanels.

If equipped

Beverage HoldersCargo Hooks


114

COIN HOLDERCARGO HOOKS

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

These hooks are not designed forlarge or heavy items.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the rear edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.

Glove Box Sunglasses HolderCoat Hooks


Instruments

andC

ontrols

115

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

There are three accessory powersockets in your vehicle. Twoaccessory power sockets are abovethe center pocket on the dashboard,and another is on the back of thecenter console.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When both sockets arebeing used, the combined powerrating of the accessories should be120 watts or less (10 amps).

Accessory Power Sockets


116

FRONT REAR

Pull up the vanity mirror cover to useit.

The light comes on when you pull upthe cover.

The light will not come on if the sunvisor is slid outward.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

In this position, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.Do not use the extended sun visorover the inside mirror.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror


Instruments

andC

ontrols

117

SUN VISOR

When the interior light control switch isin the ON position:

When the switch is in the OFF position:When the switch is in the door position:

None of the lights come on when adoor is opened.

The map lights in the front can beturned on and off by pushing eachlens. The rear map lights cannotbe used.

All the individual map lights andthe rear console light come on andstay on as long as the switchremains in the ON position.

The individual map lights and therear console light come on whenany door is opened, or when theremote transmitter or the key isused to unlock the doors. Whenthe doors are closed, eachindividual map light can be turnedon and off by pushing the lens.

The lights fade out about 30seconds after all the doors areclosed.

With any door left open and thekey is removed from the ignitionswitch, the lights stay on about 3minutes, then go out.

Interior Light Control Switch

Interior Lights

118

ON

OFF

DOOR POSITION

Turn on a front individual map lightby pushing the lens. Push the lensagain to turn it off. With the interiorlight control switch in the doorposition, a rear map light can beturned on by pushing the lens. Pushthe lens again to turn it off.

The courtesy light in each doorcomes on when you open that door.The light around the ignition switchonly comes on when you open thedriver’s door. After you close thedoor, the ignition switch light fadesout in about 30 seconds.

The courtesy light in the back of thecenter console comes on when youopen any door with the interior lightcontrol switch in the door position.After you close the doors, the lightfades out.

The map lights stay on when theinterior light control switch is in thedoor position and the map lightswitch is on.

The courtesy light between the frontmap lights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the instrumentpanel brightness control dial on thedashboard (see page ).78

If equipped

Individual Map Lights Individual Interior Lights Courtesy Light

Interior Lights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

119

If you turn the ignition switch toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)without turning off the bed lights,the lights and the indicator willremain on, then go off after 20minutes (see page ).

Your vehicle has bed lights in thepickup bed: a light on each frontupper and rear bottom side. With theshift lever in the Park position, thebed lights come on when you pushthe bed light switch on thedashboard, swing open the tailgate,or open the In-Bed Trunk. Theindicator on the instrument panelalso comes on to remind you that thebed lights are on.

To turn off the lights, push the lightswitch again, or close the tailgateand the In-Bed Trunk.

When you move the shift lever out ofthe Park position, the bed lights gooff and cannot be used.

69

Bed Lights

120

BED LIGHT SWITCH

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them. (If you have an optionalaudio system, refer to the operatinginstructions that came with it.)

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps todiscourage vandalism and theft ofyour vehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 122Using the Heater ....................... 126

Using Automatic Climate...................................Control . 128

........................Rear Ventilation . 129..........Dual Temperature Control . 130

..............Climate Control Sensors . 132..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 133

............AM/FM Radio Reception . 140.Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 142

..........Playing a CD, CD Changer . 148....................Protecting Your CDs . 159

CD Player/Changer Error...................................Messages . 160

................Remote Audio Controls . 161...Playing an Optional Audio Unit . 161

.................Radio Theft Protection . 162..........................Setting the Clock . 163

............................Security System . 164...............................Cruise Control . 165

.........................................Compass . 168HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 171Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)-Required.............Federal Explanation . 175

On all models except RT, RTX, andCanadian LX

Features

Features

121

...........................Using the A/C . 126

Vents, Heating, and A/C

122

FAN CONTROL DIAL

MODE BUTTONSTEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTBUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

OFF BUTTON WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

MAX A/C BUTTON

MODE BUTTONS

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTONAUTO BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATUREDISPLAY

RECIRCULATION BUTTON PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

MODEBUTTON

FAN CONTROL BUTTONSRTS, RTL, andCanadian EXL models

RT, RTX, andCanadian LX models

Turn the dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Turn thedial counterclockwise to decrease it.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXLmodels, see pages and forinformation on automatic climatecontrol and semi-automatic operation.

Select the fan speed by pressing thefan control buttons ( or ).The fan speed is shown in verticalbars on the display.

When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, both sides adjust to thedriver’s side temperature.

Push the DUAL button. When theindicator in the button is on, turn thedials to adjust the temperature.

The driver and passenger can selectindependent temperature settings.

You can set the temperatures for thedriver’s side and the passenger’s sideseparately when this button ispressed (indicator on). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature with the driver’sside temperature control dial.

Press the DUAL button to selectdual temperature control mode (seepage ).130

128 129

CONTINUED


On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX modelsOn RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXLmodels




Fan Control

Temperature Control Dual Button

Features

123

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

Each time you press the MODEbutton (On RTS, RTL, and CanadianEXL models) or either mode button(On RT, RTX, and Canadian LXmodels), the display shows the modeselected.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard, rear andthe floor vents.

Air flows from the center,corner, and rear vents in thedashboard.

Recirculation Button Mode ControlAir Conditioning (A/C) Button


124

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the back window.Press the button, Air flows

from the defroster vents at the baseof the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center, side, and rear vents in thedashboard. Pressing the orA/C button cancels MAX A/C.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode.

1.

2.3.4.





MAX A/C Button Ventilation

Features

125

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The display shows A/CON on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to the freshair mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Set the fan to the desired speed.Select MAX A/C mode.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects , andswitches to recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

1.

2.3.

1.2.

3.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

72

If the interior is very warm,


Using the Heater Using the A/C


126

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Turn the fan on.Press the A/C button.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

Set the fan to the desired speed orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . When you select

, the system automaticallyswitches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C. The A/Cindicator will not be displayed if itwas off to start with.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the side vents.

Your vehicle has heating wires at thebottom of the windshield to helpheat the wiper blades and thewindshield. If the outsidetemperature is near freezing, theheater turns on automatically whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. The heater turnsoff automatically when the outsidetemperature is above freezing.

This function helps to increase wiperperformance when the wiper armssit in the parked position in snowy oricy conditions.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost Automatic Heated Wiper Zone


Features

127

－

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator does not come on ifit was off to start with.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel next to(passenger’s side) or below it(driver’s side). This will send morewarm air to the windshield defrostervents. Once the windshield is clear,select fresh air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

Whenthe indicator in the DUAL button ison, the driver’s side and passenger’sside temperature can be controlledindependently (see page ).

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Set the desired temperature byturning the temperature controldial. You will see AUTO in thesystem’s display.

Press the AUTO button.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

1.

2.3.

130

Dual Temperature Control



To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Using Automatic Climate Control

128

－

－

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

You can adjust the direction of theair coming from the rear vents in theback of the center console bymoving the tab in the center of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.

You can also adjust the amount ofairflow by turning the dial betweenthe vents.

Making any manual selection causesthe word AUTO in the display to goout.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in full automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

If you press OFF, the climate controlsystem shuts off.





Semi-automatic Operation To Turn Everything Off Rear Ventilation

Features

129

DIAL

TAB

The driver’s side and passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these dials when thegreen indicator in the DUAL buttonis on.

Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol dials, one for the driver, andone for the front passenger.

Push AUTO or to turn on thesystem. The selected temperaturesappear in the display. When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature by adjusting thedriver’s side temperature control dial.



Temperature Control Dials

130

DUAL BUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATUREDISPLAY

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

U.S. model is shown

To set the driver’s side temperaturedifferently than the passenger’s,press the DUAL button, then turnthe driver’s control dial. To set thepassenger’s side differently than thedriver’s, turn the passenger’s controldial. You can adjust the passenger’sside without pressing the DUALbutton first.

When you set the temperature to itslower or upper limit, it is displayed as

or .


Features

131

PASSENGER’S SIDEDRIVER’S SIDE

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is under thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.


Climate Control Sensors

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

132

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

CONTINUED

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Features

133

AM/FMBUTTON

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

POWER BUTTON

STEREO INDICATORVOLUMEKNOB

TUNE BARPRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

AM/FMBUTTON

TUNE BARPRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

POWER BUTTON

VOLUMEKNOB

SEEK/SKIP BARSEEK/SKIP BAR

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

U.S. RTS modelU.S. RT and RTX models


134

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

POWER BUTTON


PRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE BARPRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

POWER BUTTON

VOLUMEKNOB


FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON

FMBUTTONAMBUTTON

TUNE BAR

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

Canadian LX model Canadian EXL model without navigation system


Features

135

AM/FMBUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

POWER BUTTON


TUNE BARPRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE BARPRESET BARS

SEEK/SKIP BAR

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE BARPRESET BARS

POWER BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR SCAN BUTTON

POWER BUTTON

VOLUME KNOB

VOLUME KNOB

FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

U.S. RTL model without navigation system U.S. RTL model with navigation system

Canadian EXL model with navigation system

－

－

－－

－－

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR button or the AM/FM button(AM or FM button on Canadianmodels). Adjust the volume byturning the volume knob.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, thepreset bars, and AUTO SELECT.

Pushing the AUDIO button will alsoturn on the system (see page ).

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button). On theFM band, ST will be displayed if thestation is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction in AM is notavailable.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and press the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of thebar, then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a station

with a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwelve stations.

Each side of the bars(1 6) can store one station on AM,and two stations on FM.1.

2.

3.

4.

138

On vehicles with navigation system

To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

PRESET


136

－

－

－

－

－

－

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset barsas previously described.

, press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Press the SOUND button repeatedlyto display the SUBWOOFER (ifequipped), BASS, TREBLE, FADER,and BALANCE settings.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset bars.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset bar if auto selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset bar.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the VOLUME knobto adjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the display.The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about 5 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

To turn off auto select

If equipped


Adjusting the Sound

AUTO SELECT

SUBWOOFER

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Features

137

－

－In addition to the knobs, buttons, andbars on the radio control panel, youcan operate some of the radiocontrols on the navigation systemscreen.

To adjust the sound, push theAUDIO button, then enter the soundgrid by touching the SOUND icon onthe display.

While you are listening to the radio,you can change to another band bypressing the AUDIO button next tothe navigation system screen, andthen touching the desired band icon(FM1, FM2, or AM).

AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUNDare adjustable from the navigationscreen. For an explanation of thesefunctions, see pages and .

Touch theA.SEL icon to activate the auto selectfunction. You will see A.SEL flashingon the display.

Touch the SCAN icon toactivate the scan function. You willsee SCAN in the display. Touch theicon again to deactivate it.

136 137


Operating the Radio on theNavigation System Screen

AUTO SELECT

SCAN

Adjusting the Sound


138

AUDIO BUTTON

－

－

－＋To adjust the treble

and bass, touch or on eachside of the treble or bass adjustmentbar. The adjustment bar shows youthe current setting.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control dial to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

These modes adjustthe strength of the sound comingfrom each speaker. Left/Rightbalance adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while Front/Rear faderadjusts the front-to-back strength.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjustthe front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’or ‘‘RR’’ icon.

To see the audio display when youare finished adjusting the sound,wait 5 seconds.

78

Audio System Lighting

Treble/Bass

Left/Right Balance and Front/Rear Fader


Features

139

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). Driving very near the transmitter of

a station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,atmospheric conditions, and evenitems stored on the roof rack.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

140

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

141

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

142

POWER BUTTON

TUNE BAR

VOLUMEKNOB

DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON

PRESET BARS

SCAN BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

POWER BUTTON

VOLUMEKNOB

CATEGORY BAR

DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON

PRESET BARS

TUNE BAR

SCANBUTTON

XM RADIO BUTTON

XM RADIO BUTTON

U.S. RTL model without navigation system U.S. RTL model with navigation system

－On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Satellite Radioanywhere in the United States,except Hawaii and Alaska.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.The navigation system screen alsoshows all XM information when theAUDIO button is pressed.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position. Push thePWR button to turn on the audio

system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.Adjust the volume by turning thevolume knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

You can also change to the XM radiowhile you are listening to an FMstation, AM station, CD, etc., bytouching the XM1 or XM2 icon onthe audio display (navigation systemscreen).

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:Channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title. CONTINUED

U.S. RTL model only


Operating the XM Radio

MODE

Features

143


－

－

－

－Press the TUNE bar tochange channel selections. Press

for higher numbered channelsand for lower numberedchannels. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

Press either side of the CATEGORYbar ( or ) to select anothercategory.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the screen.The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want to listento, press the button or touch the iconagain.

You can store up to 12preset channels using each side ofthe preset bar or preset icons on thescreen. Each side of the bar storesone channel from the XM1 band andone channel from the XM2 band.

Pick a preset number (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the bar (icon) until you hear abeep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper side of the presetbar (icon) to tune to it.

To store a channel:

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

Press the XM button again ortouch the other XM icon (XM1 orXM2) on the audio display. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.


TUNE

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

SCAN

Preset

144

－

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

The encryptioncode is beingupdated. Waituntil theencryption code isfully updated.Channels 0 and 1should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently tooweak. Move thevehicle to an areaaway from tallbuildings, andwith anunobstructed viewof the southernhorizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist oris not part of yoursubscription, or thischannel has no artist ortitle information at thistime.

The channelcurrently selected isno longerbroadcasting.

XM is loading theaudio or programinformation.

There is a problemwith the XMantenna. Pleaseconsult your dealer.


XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

Features

145

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.


146

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR button to turn on the audiosystem and press the XM RADIObutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, press the TUNE

bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


Features

147

Playing a CD, CD Changer

148

AM/FMBUTTON

PRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

PRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON


CD BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

CD BUTTON EJECT BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR

CD SLOT

REPEATBUTTON

CD SLOT

RANDOMBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

U.S. RTS modelU.S. RT and RTX models

CONTINUED


Features

149

PRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

PRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR SEEK/SKIP BAR

EJECT BUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR

CD SLOT

REPEATBUTTON

AM BUTTON

FM BUTTON CD SLOT

CD BUTTON

AM BUTTON

FMBUTTON

CD BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

Canadian LX model Canadian EXL model without navigation system


150

AM/FMBUTTON

PRESET BARS

SCANBUTTON

PRESET BARS

SEEK/SKIP BAR

SEEK/SKIP BAR

SCAN BUTTON

LOAD BUTTON

CD BUTTON

EJECT BUTTON

CD SLOT

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

LOAD INDICATOR RANDOM BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

CD BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

CD BUTTON

AMBUTTON

FM BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BARS REPEAT BUTTON

U.S. RTL model without navigation system

Canadian EXL model with navigation system

U.S. RTL model with navigation system

－

－

－

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on theselected disc in the order they arerecorded. To activate it, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display, and you willget a 10 second sampling of eachtrack on the selected CD. Press theSCAN button again to get out of scanmode.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring.

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,insert a CD about halfway into theCD slot. The drive will pull the CD inthe rest of the way and begin to playit. You operate the CD player withthe same controls used for the radio.The number of the track playing isshown in the display. The system willcontinuously play a CD until youchange modes.

Push the side of the SEEK/SKIP bar to play the next track onthe disc. Push the side once toreplay the track in play; press it twiceto replay the previous track.To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or the sideof the bar.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously replay a track. Youwill see RPT in the display. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

Press the RDMbutton to play the tracks in randomorder. You will see RDM in thedisplay. Press the RDM button againto return to normal play.

RT, RTX, and Canadian LX modelsTo Change Tracks SCANCD Player

REPEAT

RANDOM


Features

151

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.

－＋

Press the AM/FM button (AM orFM button) to switch to the radiowhile a CD is playing. Press the CDbutton to play the CD.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWRbutton or by turning off the ignition,the CD stays in the drive. When youturn the system back on, the CDbegins playing where it left off.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available CD to load andplay.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

An optional six disc CD changer isavailable for your vehicle from yourdealer.

This disc changer uses the samecontrols used for the in-dash CDplayer/changer and the radio.

Load the desired CDs into themagazine, and load the magazineinto the changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the CD changer, press theAUX button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 5(DISC ) side for a previous disc orthe preset 6 (DISC ) side to selectthe next disc in sequence.

159

RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models

Operating the Optional CDChanger

To Stop Playing a CD

Protecting Discs


152

To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonnext to the CD slot until the loadindicator above the slot turns fromamber to green.

Your audio system has an in-dashCD changer that holds up to six CDs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

The CD changer is behind thenavigation system screen. To use theCD changer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the CD changer appears.

Be careful not to injure your fingerswhen opening or closing thenavigation system screen.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the OPEN buttonagain. Do not use the folded screenas a tray. If you put a cup, forexample, on the screen, the liquidinside the cup may spill on thescreen when you go over a bump.

1.

CONTINUED


On vehicles with navigation systemOn RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXLmodels

Operating the CD Changer Loading CDs in the In-dash CDChanger


Features

153

OPEN BUTTON LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR

CD SLOT

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause the CDto jam in the unit.

The indicators above the discbuttons of the empty positions willblink, and the green load indicatorabove the CD slot comes on.

If you press the LOAD button whilea CD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the first CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for 10 seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate disc button.Select an empty disc button (theindicator above the button is off),and press the button. The systemwill stop playing the current CD andstart the loading sequence. It willthen play the CD just loaded.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

Insert a CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns amber and blinks as the CDis loaded.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again inthe display, insert the next CD intothe CD slot.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

On the upper right side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinking,and the green CD load indicatorwill come on.

2.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.On vehicles without navigation system


154

－

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, press the LOAD buttonagain after the last CD has loaded.The system will begin playing thelast CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for 10 seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate side of a preset bar(1 6). On models with navigationsystem, touch the appropriate discicon. If you select an empty positionin the CD changer, the system willgo into the loading sequence.

When that CD ends, the next CD inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last CD finishes, thesystem returns to the first CD.

Insert a CD into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again inthe display, insert the next CD intothe CD slot.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

3.

4.

5.

To Play a CD


Features

155

Each time you press and release theside of the TUNE bar, the

system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

When you press the SCAN button ortouch the TRACK SCAN icon on thescreen, the first track of the currentdisc plays for about 10 seconds. Youwill see SCAN in the screen and inthe display. To hear the rest of thetrack, press the SCAN button ortouch the TRACK SCAN icon againwithin 10 seconds. If you don’t, thesystem advances to the next track,plays about 10 seconds of it, andcontinues through the rest of thetracks the same way. When thesystem reaches the last track,TRACK SCAN is cancelled, and theCD plays normally.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theTUNE bar.

When you press the SCAN button, orwhen you touch the DISC SCANicon on the screen, the first track ofthe current CD plays for about 10seconds. You will see D-SCAN in thedisplay and DISC SCAN in thescreen. To hear the rest of the CD,press the SCAN button or touch theDISC SCAN icon again, within 10seconds. If you don’t, the systemadvances to the next disc, playsabout 10 seconds of it, and continuesthroughout the rest of the CDs thesame way. When the system reachesthe last disc, DISC SCAN iscancelled, and the CD plays normally.

On vehicles with navigation systemTo Change or Select Tracks Track Scan Disc Scan


156

When you press the RDM button ortouch the TRACK RANDOM icon onthe screen, the system plays thetracks of the current disc in randomorder. You will see RDM (TRACKRANDOM) in the display. To turnthis feature off, press the RDMbutton (touch TRACK RANDOM)again.

Operation of DISC SCAN and DISCREPEAT on the screen is possibleonly when the screen is in theupright position.

When you press and release the RPTbutton or touch the TRACKREPEAT icon on the screen, thesystem continuously replays thecurrent track. As a reminder, youwill see RPT (TRACK REPEAT) inthe display. To turn this feature off,press the RPT button, or touch theTRACK REPEAT icon again.

When you press and hold the RPTbutton until D-RPT (DISC REPEAT)is in the display, or when you touchthe DISC REPEAT icon on thescreen, the system continuouslyreplays the current disc. As areminder, you will see D-RPT in thedisplay.



Track Repeat Random Play within a Disc

Disc Repeat


Features

157

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button (AM orFM button) or XM button (U.S.models). Each time you press theAM/FM button (AM or FM button),the system changes to the nextmode (AM, FM1, or FM2). Whenyou return to CD mode by pressingthe CD button, play will continuewhere it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWRbutton or the ignition switch, playwill continue at the same point whenyou turn it back on.

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is on or off:

To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the LOADindicator begins to blink.

To remove the disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe appropriate preset bar orcorresponding number on the screen.When that disc begins playing, pressthe eject button.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notload another CD within 10 seconds,the system selects the previousmode [AM, FM1, FM2, or XM Radio(U.S. models)].

If you do not remove the CD fromthe slot, the system will reload theCD after 10 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the CD, press the CD button.

To Stop Playing a Disc Removing CDs from the In-dashCD Changer


158

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly or possibly jam in the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the CD changer.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality CDs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDs

Features

159

Message SolutionCauseIf you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

Press the disc eject button, and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourdealer.Press the disc eject button, and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourdealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Focus Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

CD Player/Changer Error Messages

160

▲ ▼

▲

▼

▲▼The VOL button adjusts the volume

up ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. They let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the steering wheel.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM Radio (U.S. models), CD (if adisc is loaded) or a tape (if theoptional tape player is installed and atape is loaded).

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.

When the appropriate audio unit isconnected to the auxiliary input jack,press the CD/AUX or AUX button toselect the unit.

The auxiliary input jack is on the trayabove the glove box. The system willaccept auxiliary input from standardaudio accessories.

On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXLmodels On vehicles with navigation system

Auxiliary Input Jack

Remote Audio Controls, Playing an Optional Audio Unit

Features

161

MODE BUTTONVOL BUTTON

CH BUTTON

AUXILIARYINPUT JACK

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific code with the presetbars. Because there are hundreds ofnumber combinations possible fromthe five digits, making the systemwork without knowing the exactcode is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from your dealer.To do this, you will need the audiosystem’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbars to enter the code. The code islocated on the radio code cardincluded in your owner’s manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have ten tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin ten attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

Radio Theft Protection

162

Press and hold the H (Preset 1) sideof the bar until the hour advances tothe desired time. Press and hold theM (Preset 2) side of the bar until theminutes advance to the desired time.

To set the time, press the clock setbutton until you hear a beep. Thedisplayed time begins to blink.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock. You can quickly set the time to the

nearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theclock set button until you hear abeep, then pressing the R (Preset 3)side of the bar sets the clock back tothe previous hour.If the displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets forward to thebeginning of the next hour.

Press the clock set button again toenter the set time.

For example:

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

On models with Navigation System

On vehicles without Navigation System

Setting the Clock

Features

163

CLOCK SETBUTTON

CLOCK SETBUTTON

U.S. models are shown. PRESET BARS PRESET BARS

RTS, RTL, andCanadian EXLmodels

RT, RTX, andCanadian LXmodels

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the In-Bed Trunk.For the system to activate, you mustlock the doors from the outside withthe key, driver’s lock tab, door lockswitch, or remote transmitter. Thesecurity system indicator above thedriver’s door lock tab starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), thehood, or the In-Bed Trunk, will causeit to alarm. It also alarms if the radioand navigation components areremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, licenseplate lights, and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, In-Bed Trunk, or any dooris not fully closed. If the system willnot set, check the door and tailgateopen monitor and In-Bed Trunk openindicator on the instrument panel(see pages and ) to see if thedoors and In-Bed Trunk are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

Use the remote transmitterto quickly check that the hood,In-Bed Trunk, and all doors areclosed. Push the lock button twicewithin 5 seconds. There should be anaudible confirmation beep.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

64 69

If equipped

Security System

164

NOTE:

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The indicator on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Push the CRUISE button. Theindicator in the button will comeon.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features

165

CRUISEBUTTON

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

The main switch can be left on, even when the system is not in use.

NOTE:

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panel willcome back on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

166

NOTE:

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap on the brake pedal, the systemwill remember the previously setcruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h) and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on thedashboard.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features

167

The direction and center positionicons come on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. The system then begins tocheck the vehicle direction andilluminates the appropriate icon(s).

The compass can be affected bydriving near power lines or stations,across bridges, through tunnels,over railroad crossings, past largevehicles, or driving near largeobjects that cause magneticinterference. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.

Your vehicle has a compass in therear view mirror. The compassindicates the vehicle direction withilluminated letters; N (north), S(south), W (west), and E (east). Thecenter blue icon in the compass isalways on. It serves as a referencepoint.

To turn the compass on or off, pressthe compass button on the back ofthe rear view mirror.

The compass mirror has a lightsensor behind the right side of therear view mirror. Make sure theextended sun visor or an accessory isnot covering the sensor.

If equippedCompass Function

Compass

168

COMPASSBUTTON

CENTER ICON

REAR VIEW MIRROR

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to continually showthe wrong direction, do this.

Drive the vehicle slowly in circlesat less than 5 mph (8 km/h) untilthe center icon turns blue. Thisicon also turns blue by continuingto drive the vehicle under normaldriving conditions. When you seean actual heading on the compass,calibration is completed.

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:

Find the zone for your area on thezone map (see page ). Eachzone number (1 through 15)corresponds to a compass zone onthe table (see page ).

Press and hold the compassbutton for about 3 seconds. Whenall of the direction icons begin toblink, release the button.

The blue direction icon(s) blinkand show the current zone.

If the zone is incorrect, press andrelease the compass buttonrepeatedly to get to the correctnumber.

The compass will return to thenormal display about 4 secondsafter you stop adjusting a zonenumber.

Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

With the blue center icondisplayed, press and hold thecompass button for about 6seconds. When the center iconturns red, release the button.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

5.

170

170

CONTINUED

Compass Calibration

Compass Zone Selection

Compass

Features

169

NOTE:

Compass

170

Zone Map Compass Display for Each Zone

－

To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

The HomeLink universaltransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured beforeApril 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.They do not have the safety feature

that causes the motor to stop andreverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote transmitterfor the device (garage door,automatic gate, security system, etc.)has a fresh battery.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the electrical outlet.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote transmitter 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

1.

2.

If equipped

CONTINUED

Training HomeLink

General Information


Before you begin

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Features

171

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it for about 1

second.If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work goto step 6.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 4.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 2 thru 4.

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).

If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

If the indicator stays on orflashes slowly, repeat steps 2thru 5.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

173


172

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

Find the ‘‘training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press the HomeLink button againfor about 1 second. It shouldoperate the garage door.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem


Features

173

TRAINING BUTTON

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 3 thru 6 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

1.

2.

171




Erasing Codes

Retraining a ButtonCustomer Assistance


174

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

and

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

Features

175

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

176

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 178.................Fuel Recommendation . 178

.........Service Station Procedures . 179....................................Refueling . 179

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 181

...................................Oil Check . 182.............Engine Coolant Check . 182

...............................Fuel Economy . 183...Accessories and Modifications . 184

.............................Carrying Cargo . 186

Before Driving

Before

Driving

177

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

We recommended using a qualitygasoline containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contact

your authorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 % ethanol byvolume and up to 15 % MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Premium fuel is recommended whentowing in certain conditions (seepage ).

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

224

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Quick Start Guide

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

178

CONTINUED

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Insert theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Refueling

Service Station Procedures

Before

Driving

179

Pull

FUEL FILL CAPATTACHMENT

TETHER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Whenever filling a fuel container,use an approved fuel container, andplace it on the ground. Do not fill thefuel container in the vehicle,including the pickup bed and theIn-Bed Trunk. Make sure to put thefuel pump nozzle in the fuel filler ofthe container securely and to handleit properly.

Your vehicle has a warning label forfilling a portable fuel container onthe left rear side of the pickup bed.

Before placing the fuel container inthe vehicle, wipe up any spillcompletely.

Gasoline or fuel vapors areextremely flammable and explosive.Improperly handling fuel can causean explosion in which you can beseriously injured.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

5.

6.

289


Filling a Portable Fuel Container

180

Do not fill a portable fuelcontainer in the pickup bed.

Static electricity can ignite gasvapors and you can be burned.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood. The hood latchhandle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pullthis handle until it releases thehood, then lift the hood.

Pull the support rod out of its clip,and insert the end into either ofthe designated holes pointed to byan arrow.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle under the lower leftcorner of the dashboard. Thehood will pop up slightly.

1. 2. 3.


Opening and Closing the Hood

Before

Driving

181

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

SUPPORT ROD

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

246

249

241


Adding Engine Oil

Engine Coolant CheckOil Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

182

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

MAX

MIN

RESERVE TANK

For example, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside or on thetruck bed adds weight and rollingresistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage andreduces the chance of corrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display. See

on page.241

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Fuel Economy

Before

Driving

183

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

If you install a truck cap, be sure it isproperly installed and does notexceed your vehicle’s load limits (seepage ).187

291

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Your vehicle should not be used tocarry a slide-in camper.

184

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety systems could make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. In these areas,accessories may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying Your Vehicle

Before

Driving

185

The pickup bed on your vehicleallows you to carry heavy and largecargo. You can also store items inthe In-Bed Trunk and on a roof-rack(if equipped).

Your vehicle also has theseconvenient storage areas inside:

Glove boxFront door and seat-back pocketsFold-up rear seat with under-seatstorageConsole compartmentPockets on the dashboard

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

186

GLOVE BOX

DASHBOARDPOCKETS

PICKUP BED

CONSOLECOMPARTMENTS

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

FOLD-UP REAR SEAT WITH UNDER-SEAT STORAGE

IN-BED TRUNK

DOOR POCKET

－ ×

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 1,530(1,480) lbs’’ on your vehicle’splacard. [The placard is on thedriver’s doorjamb.]

To determine the correct cargo andluggage load limit:The maximum load for your vehicle

is:

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from1,530 (1,480) pounds.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the maximum load is1,530 lbs and there will be five 150lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 780 lbs.[1,530 750 (5 150) = 780 lbs.]

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedin the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity instep 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

These figures include the totalweight of all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue loadmust not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) or thegross axle weight rating (GAWR).Both are on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

212

On vehicles without moonroof

On vehicles with moonroof

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits (Payload)

Before

Driving

187

1,530 lbs (690 kg)

1,480 lbs (670 kg)

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor in the In-Bed Trunk, placingthe heaviest items on the bottomand as far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownduring a crash or sudden stop.

Make sure the In-Bed Trunk lid isclosed securely before driving.

Be sure the total weight of theitems in the In-Bed Trunk does notexceed 300 lbs (136 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, the proper operation of theseats, or proper operation of thesensors under the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

If you fold the rear seats up, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop. Also, keep all cargobelow the bottom of the windows.If it is higher, it could interferewith the proper operation of theside curtain airbags.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area with therear seats folded up, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tie

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 110 lb (50 kg).

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the In-BedTrunk or on a Roof Rack

Carrying Cargo

188

down items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crashor sudden stop.

CONTINUED

Your vehicle can carry a largeamount of cargo in the pickup bed.

However, the pickup bed is notintended for carrying passengers.People who ride in the pickup bedcan be very seriously injured orkilled in a crash (see page ).

Make sure your cargo is properlyloaded and all items are secured sothey will not shift or fall out whiledriving.

When loading and unloading cargo,make sure all passengers or anyobjects are clear of the tailgatebefore opening or closing it. Thetailgate should be closed securelybefore driving when it is not usedas the extended pickup bed.

The maximum allowable loadingweight on the pickup bed is 1,100lbs (500 kg). Do not exceed theload limit (see page ).

Distribute cargo evenly on thepickup bed. Place the heaviestitems on the bottom and as farforward as possible of the rearaxle. Tie down and secure allitems that could be thrown out ofthe vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you stack items higher than thebed sides, tailgate, or back window,secure them with a net or cover.This will reduce the risk of itemsbeing thrown out of the pickupbed during a crash or sudden stop.

When the tailgate is dropped open,it can be used as an extendedpickup bed. The maximumallowable weight on the tailgatewhile driving is 300 lbs (136 kg).Exceeding this limit could damagethe tailgate.

Carrying heavy cargo in thepickup bed will raise your vehicle’scenter of gravity. This can affecthandling and performance. Drivemore slowly and cautiously, andallow extra time and distance forbraking.

8

187

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Cargo in the Pickup Bed

Before

Driving

189

Allowing passengers to ride inthe pickup bed or on the tailgatecan result in death or seriousinjury in a crash.

Make sure all passengers ridein a seat and wear a seat beltproperly.

Your vehicle has six tie down cleatson the pickup bed.

You can also support motorcycles onthe pickup bed floor with the cleats.The floor panel of the pickup bed isdesigned to hold motorcycle tires. Besure to tighten motorcycles securely,with an approved tie-down ormotorcycle strap, according to themotorcycle maker’s instructions.

They are used to secure cargo on thepickup bed and to install a cargo netfor securing items. Do not use anyother parts of the pickup bed tosecure cargo or nets.

When carrying motorcycles or anyother cargo, do not spill any oil orfluid on the pickup bed. A spilledliquid may damage the pickup bed.

Carrying Cargo

Tie Down Cleats

190

TIE DOWN CLEATNever let passengers ride onthe pickup bed or in the In-BedTrunk space. This could causevery serious injuries or death ina collision. No one should ridein any position on your vehiclethat is not equipped with seatsand seat belts.

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading cargo on thevehicle can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Load the cargo carefully beforestarting to drive.

The cargo net can be used to holdlightweight items in the pickup bed.Secure all items properly. The netmay not prevent heavy items frombeing thrown outward in a crash or asudden stop.

The cargo cover can be used tocover the cargo area on the pickupbed.

Your vehicle’s pickup bed has a rustresistant surface. To repair smallchips and scratches in the bed, arepair kit is available from yourdealer. More extensive damageshould be repaired by your dealer.

To avoid problems with the bedsurface and the In-Bed Trunk lid, donot use spray-in bed liner products.

Carrying Cargo

Optional Cargo Net Optional Cargo Cover

Pickup Bed Repair

Before

Driving

191

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the VTM-4 system, the VSAsystem, the tire pressure monitoringsystem, and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

........................Driving Guidelines . 194

........................Preparing to Drive . 195.......................Starting the Engine . 196

..............Automatic Transmission . 197Variable Torque Management

.............4WD (VTM-4) System . 203Tire Pressure Monitoring System

......................................(TPMS) . 204...........................................Parking . 206

.............................Braking System . 207...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 208

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)........................................System . 210

.................Towing Weight Limits . 212..........Towing Weight Guidelines . 214

...........................Towing a Trailer . 215Off-Highway Driving

..................................Guidelines . 227

Driving

Driving

193

Your vehicle has higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.

With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,your vehicle has a higher center ofgravity. Drive slowly and cautiously,and allow more time and distance forbraking. Loading heavy cargo couldaffect your vehicle’s handling andperformance.

To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:

Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

Make sure the cargo is properlyloaded and all items are secured sothey will not shift while driving.

Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Your vehicle allows you to carrymore cargo than a typical passengervehicle.

Because your vehicle rides higheroff the ground, it has a high centerof gravity that can cause it to rollover if you make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.

See page for off-highway drivingguidelines.

227

Driving Guidelines

194

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the tailgate is fullyclosed when it is not used as anextended pickup bed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors and In-BedTrunk are securely closed andlocked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepages and ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

8.

7.

9.

10.

11.

14

110

79

59

98 100

Preparing to Drive

Driving

195

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the Engine

196

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

81

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal, andpull the shift lever toward you. Youcannot shift out of Park when theignition switch is in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position.

CONTINUED

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission

Driving

197

SHIFT LEVER

－－This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Pull the shift levertowards you, then move it out ofPark.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

You must also pull the shift levertowards you to shift into Park. Toavoid transmission damage, come toa complete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkfor you to remove the key from theignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and pull the shift lever towardsyou to shift from Park to reverse. Toshift from reverse to neutral, cometo a complete stop, and then shift.Pull the shift lever towards youbefore shifting into reverse fromneutral.

202To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 22 to DD to NN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpull the shift lever towardsyou.

Pull the shift lever towardsyou.

Move the shift lever.


Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

198

－－

CONTINUED

Press the D3 switch on the end ofthe shift lever to turn this mode onor off; the D3 indicator comes onwhenever D3 is selected.

The D3 switch can be operated onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON(II) position and the shift lever is inthe D position.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

After you stop in D, 2, 1, N, or Rposition with the ignition switch inthe ACCESSORY (I) position for anextended period, you may not beable to move the shift lever fromneutral to reverse or Park. In thiscase, press the brake pedal, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, then shift out of neutral.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.


D3Drive (D)Neutral (N)

Driving

199

D3 SWITCH

－ To shift to second,pull the shift lever towards you, thenshift to the lower gear. This positionlocks the transmission in secondgear. It does not downshift to firstgear when you come to a stop.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

When towing a trailer on level roadsunder normal driving conditions, donot use D3. This will increase theautomatic transmission fluidtemperature and may causeoverheating.

Shifting out of the D position willcancel D3, and cause the D3indicator to go out. Selecting the Dposition again will resume D3, andthe indicator will come on.

Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position turns D3 off. Touse D3 when you restart the engine,select the D position, and press theD3 switch again.

The D3 indicator also comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

When D3 is on, the transmissionselects only the first three gears.Use D3 for engine braking whengoing down a steep hill.


Second (2)

200

D3 INDICATOR

－ To shift from second tofirst, pull the shift lever towards you,then shift to the lower gear. Thisposition locks the transmission infirst gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, and D,you can operate the transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

If you shift into first position whenthe vehicle speed is above 28 mph(45 km/h), the transmission shiftsinto second gear first to avoidsudden engine braking.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.


First (1) Engine Speed Limiter

Driving

201

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the instrument panelside. Press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

Set the parking brake.

Insert a key into the shift lockrelease slot.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pulling the shift lever doesnot work.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover. Usinga small flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

Push down on the key while youpull the shift lever towards youand move it out of Park to neutral.

6.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

Shift Lock Release


202

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

COVER

To get unstuck, apply light pressureto the accelerator pedal. Do not spinthe front tires for more than a fewseconds. Because of the amount oftorque applied to the rear tires, theyshould not spin. This is normal. Ifyou are not able to move the vehicle,stop and reverse direction.

If you become stuck, you canactivate the VTM-4 by pressing theVTM-4 LOCK button while in first(1), second (2), or reverse (R) gearbelow 18 mph (30 km/h). This modeoverrides the auto system to sendmaximum torque to the rear axle.This mode is only intended forintermittent use at low speed to freeyour vehicle if it becomes stuck orwhen you encounter a steep gradewith one wheel on a slippery surface.Generally, you should first allow theauto mode to operate to adjust forthe available traction conditions.

The vehicle speed must be below18 mph (30 km/h).

Move the shift lever to first (1),second (2), or reverse (R) gear.

Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.The indicator in the button comeson.

Your vehicle is equipped with avariable torque management4-wheel-drive system (VTM-4) thatdistributes engine torque to theappropriate drive axle depending onthe available traction conditions. Thesystem is completely automatic,always active, and does not requireany driver interaction.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

To Engage the VTM-4 Lock:

VTM-4 System

Driving

203

VTM-4 LOCK BUTTON

Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button ondry, paved roads. Driving on dry,paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON maydamage the rear dif f erential whenmaking a turn. Strange noise andvibration can also result.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

When this indicator is on, one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder inflated. You should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible.

The VTM-4 Lock will temporarilydisengage when the vehicle speedexceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). Theindicator in the button will remain on.

doany of the following:

Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator and theappropriate tire on the tire pressuremonitor to come on.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Move the shift lever to D.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.


To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

VTM-4 System, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

204

Do not continuously spin the f ront tiresof your vehicle. Continuously spinningthe f ront tires can cause transmissionor rear dif f erential damage.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

The appropriate tire indicator andlow tire pressure indicator comes onif a tire becomes significantlyunderinflated. See

on page .

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, each tire should bechecked monthly, including thespare.

Set to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the vehicleplacard and in this owner’s manual(see page ).

Check the pressure with the tirescold, after the vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours.

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure and tire monitor indicatorswill come on. Replace the indicatedflat tire with the compact spare tire(see page ).

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct.

266

204

275CONTINUED

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low TirePressure Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitor

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Driving

205

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area in your vehicle orthe In-Bed Trunk, or take themwith you.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on the driver’sdoor to verify that the securitysystem is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

On vehicles with security system




Parking TipsParking

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Parking

206

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb, and set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb, and set the parking brake.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.

Braking System Design

Braking System

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Parking, Braking System

Driving

207

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

290You should never pump the brake pedal.

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

208

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on togetherand the parking break is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down, and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

290

Important Safety Reminders

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop thevehicle.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

209

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some unusual noise from themodulator. You will also see the VSAactivation indicator blink.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicatorcomes on (see page ), the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifyou turn it off with the VSA OFFbutton.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

67

204

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

210

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA system is off, the traction control system is also off. You should only attempt to

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

This switch is above the parkingbrake release handle. Press it to turnthe VSA system on and off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

269

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

Driving

211

free your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA and traction control systems switched off.

The maximum weight of the trailerand everything in or on it depends onthe number of occupants in yourvehicle and the type of trailer beingtowed (see page ).

Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance.

Your vehicle has been designed totow a trailer, as well as carryingpassengers and their cargo. Tosafety tow a trailer, you shouldcarefully observe the load limits (seepage ), use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

Be sure to read thesection on page

if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

The weight that the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts on the hitchshould follow the recommended loadguidelines (see page ). Toomuch tongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

187

214214

227

Total Trailer Weight Tongue Load

Load Limits

Off-HighwayDriving Guidelines

Towing Weight Limits

212

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

－

－

－

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale (see page

).

Add the weight of your trailer (asquoted by the manufacturer) witheverything in or on the trailer. Thencheck the tables on page tomake sure you do not exceed thelimit for your conditions.

To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,or if you cannot get to a public scale,we recommend that you estimateyour total trailer weight and tongueload as described.

The maximumallowable weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all accessories, all cargo,and the tongue load is 6,050 lbs(2,745 kg).

The GCWR must be reduced 2percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

The maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle and trailer is 10,088 lbs(4,575 kg) with the proper hitch.

The maximumallowable weight on the vehicle axlesis 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg) on the frontaxle, and 3,245 lbs (1,475 kg) on therear axle.

212

214

Estimating LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR)

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR)

To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight

Towing Weight Limits

Driving

213

＊

＊＊

＊

＊＊－－

Number ofOccupants

2345

Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load

Towing Weight Guidelines

214

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Guidelines:

5000 lbs (2268 kg)4750 lbs (2155 kg)4750 lbs (2155 kg)4500 lbs (2041 kg)

600 lbs (272 kg)600 lbs (272 kg)570 lbs (258 kg)516 lbs (234 kg)

Recommended tongue load should be 5 15% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 10 15% of the total trailer weight for all othertrailers.

The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg),and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cab, pickup bed, or In-Bed Trunk. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reducesthe maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page ).213

To accurately check your loads atthe public scale, the vehicle andtrailer should be fully loaded, and alloccupants should stay in the vehiclewhile the attendant watches thescale.

Check the front gross axle weight.Limit: 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg)

Check the gross vehicle weight.Limit: 6,050 lbs (2,745 kg)

Check the weight of the hitchedtrailer. Write this number down.

Remember, maximum grosscombined weight should bedecreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet(305 meters) of elevation.

Check the gross combined weight.Limit: 10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)Remember, maximum grosscombined weight should bedecreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet(305 meters) of elevation.

If you cannot weigh the rear axledirectly, you can calculate the reargross axle weight by subtractingthe weight in step 1 from theweight in step 2.Limit: 2,945 lbs (1,335 kg)

Check the rear gross axle weight.Limit: 3,252 lbs (1,475 kg)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Checking Loads

Towing a Trailer

Driving

215

Check the weight of the unhitchedtrailer. Limit: See page .

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment. Toensure the best quality, werecommend that you purchaseHonda equipment whenever possible.

Calculate the tongue load.Subtract the weight in step 6 fromthe weight in step 7.Limit: See page .Recommended: See page .

Your dealer offers an optional trailerpackage for models other than RTX.The package includes a hitch, a ballmount, and a wiring harness.

Discuss any additional needs withyour trailer sales or rental agency,and make sure all equipment isproperly installed, maintained, andalso meets state, federal, province,and local regulations.

A weight distributing hitch is notrecommended for use with yourvehicle, as an improperly adjustedweight distributing hitch may reducehandling, stability, and brakingperformance.

Read the trailer manufacturer’sinstructions, and select theappropriate draw bar for the heightof the trailer you will be towing.

We strongly recommend that youhave your dealer install a class 3hitch. Using non-Honda equipmentmay result in serious damage to yourvehicle.

7.

8.

212

214214

All models except RTXTowing Equipment andAccessories

Hitch

Weight Distributing Hitch

Towing a Trailer

216

There are two common types oftrailer brakes: surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer manufacturer formore information on installingelectric brakes.

Honda requires that any trailer witha total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455kg) or more have its own brakes.

A factory installed, 4-pin grayconnector is located under theinstrument panel near the top of theparking brake pedal. This connectorhas all of the circuits required toinstall most electric trailer brakecontrollers. A jumper harness toadapt your electric trailer brakecontroller to the vehicle is includedwith the optional Genuine Hondatrailer hitch kit. To obtain a trailerhitch kit, see your dealer.

Have a qualified mechanic installyour trailer brake controllerfollowing the trailer brake controllermanufacturer’s instructions. Failureto properly install the trailer brakecontroller may increase the distanceit takes for you to stop your vehiclewhen towing a trailer.

Use this illustration to identify eachterminal in the trailer brakecontroller connector.

CONTINUED

Trailer Brakes

Towing a Trailer

Driving

217

BRAKE(20A)(BLUE)

GROUND(BLACK)

ELECTRIC BRAKE(BROWN/WHITE)

STOP(WHITE/BLACK)

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

This device is recommended if yourtrailer tends to sway. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

Many states and provinces requirespecial exterior mirrors when towinga trailer. Even if they don’t, youshould install special mirrors if youcannot clearly see behind you, or ifthe trailer creates a blind spot.

When towing a trailer, werecommend that you carry a full-sizespare wheel and tire for your vehicleand trailer. See page for propertire size, page for how to store afull size wheel and tire, and page

for information on changing aflat tire.

Remember to unhitch the trailerbefore changing a flat. Ask yourtrailer sales or rental agency whereand how to store the trailer’s sparetire.

269280

275

Safety Chains

Sway Control

Trailer Mirrors

Spare Tires

Towing a Trailer

218

＋

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check trailerlight requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow, and use onlyequipment designed for your vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary withtrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

Your vehicle is equipped with aconnector to install an optional trailerlighting connector that mates withyour vehicle.

We recommend that you have yourdealer install a Honda wiring harnessand converter. This harness hasbeen designed for your vehicle.

Refer to the above illustration forwiring information.

Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving

219

GROUND(BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNALAND BRAKE LIGHTS(GREEN/WHITE)

TAILLIGHTS(GREEN/BLACK)


RIGHT TURN SIGNALAND BRAKE LIGHTS(GREEN/RED)

BACK-UP LIGHTS(BLUE)

GROUND(BLACK)

B CHARGE(GREEN)

Your vehicle has a class 3 trailerhitch as standard equipment.

The cover, the ball mount, the hitchpin, the hitch pin clip, and the jumperharness are stored in the In-BedTrunk.

Also see page for trailer-relatedinformation.

We recommend that you always usethe cover when you are not using theball mount to keep dirt, mud, andsnow from clogging the hitch.

To install the cover, slide it into theopening at the end of the trailerhitch. To remove the cover, pull itout and store it in a safe place.

Install the ball mount before you towa trailer. Check for and removeforeign material inside of the trailerhitch before installing the ball mount.

To install the ball mount, slide it intothe trailer hitch. Line up the holes inthe trailer hitch with the holes in theball mount, then insert the hitch pininto the hole. Secure the hitch pinwith the hitch pin clip.

218

On U.S. RTX model only

Towing a Trailer

Towing Equipment Installing the Cover Installing the Ball Mount

220

TRAILER HITCH

7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR

4-PIN TRAILERCONNECTOR

TRAILER HITCH COVER HITCH PIN

HITCH PINCLIP

BALL MOUNT

TRAILER HITCH

CONTINUED

The 7-pin trailer connector is neededfor the trailer lights. To connect theconnector, do this:

Make sure the connector and thesocket are free of dirt, moisture,or other foreign material.

Open the socket lid by pulling it up.

Insert the connector securely intothe socket.

Hook the retaining tab on theinner side of the lid against theretaining tab of the connector toprevent disconnection duringoperation.

Remove the socket cover, andattach it securely over the socket.

Insert the connector into thesocket securely to preventdisconnection during operation.

The 4-pin trailer connector is alsoneeded for the trailer lights. Toconnect the connector, do this:

1. 1.

2.

3.

4.

2.

Towing a Trailer

Connecting the Trailer Connectors

Driving

221


SOCKET

RETAININGTAB

RETAININGTAB

LID


SOCKET

COVER



To disconnect the connectors,reverse the connection steps, thenmake sure the socket lid andsocket cover are securely in place.Avoid using excessive force whendisconnecting the connectors.

Electric current flows through theelectrical supply circuit only whenthe ignition switch is in the ON(II) position.Using the electrical supply circuitwhen the engine is at a stop oridling can discharge the battery.

Before you submerge the trailerhitch in water (such as at a boatramp), make sure the connectorsare removed and the socket lidand socket cover are securely inplace. Failure to do this will resultin electrical system problems.

After the connectors aresubmerged in water, open thesocket lid and the socket cover todrain them.

Towing a Trailer

Important Precautions

222

＋

Refer to the above illustrations forwiring information.

The trailer jumper harness is used toinstall the controller for the electrictrailer brakes. For more information,see on page .217

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Connector Sockets

Trailer Brakes

Trailer Jumper Harness

Driving

223

7-PIN TRAILER SOCKET

ELECTRICBRAKE(BLUE)

SMALLLIGHT(GREEN)

BCHARGE(BLACK)

BACK LIGHT(YELLOW)

GROUND(WHITE)

4-PIN TRAILER SOCKET

GROUND(WHITE)

GROUND(BLACK)


BRAKE LIGHTS(WHITE/BLACK)

BRAKE(20A)(WHITE)

LEFT TURN/STOP(YELLOW)

RIGHT TURN/STOP(GREEN)

SMALL LIGHTS(BROWN)

RIGHTTURN/STOP(BROWN)

LEFTTURN/STOP(RED)

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

Your vehicle tires and spare are ingood condition and properlyinflated.

The trailer tires and spare are ingood condition and inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

Towing performance can beaffected by high altitude, hightemperature, or when climbingsteep grades. Therefore, premiumfuel (premium unleaded gasolinewith pump octane number of 91 orhigher) is recommended whentowing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590kg).

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km).

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

Driving Safely With a TrailerPre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

Break-In Period

224

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and use D3. Do not‘‘ride’’ the brakes.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.When towing a fixed-sided trailer(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph(88 km/h). At higher speeds, thetrailer may sway or affect vehiclehandling.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

When towing a trailer on level roadsunder normal driving conditions, donot use D3. This will increase theautomatic transmission fluidtemperature and may causeoverheating.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses.

Allow more time and distance forbraking. Do not brake or turnsuddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,your vehicle has a higher center ofgravity. Drive more slowly andcautiously. Loading heavy cargocould affect your vehicle’s handlingand performance.

CONTINUED

Remember, ittakes longer to slow down andstop when towing a trailer.

Towing Speeds and Gears

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer

Driving

225

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left. Turnthe wheel to the right to move thetrailer to the right.

Do not park on an incline unless it isunavoidable. If you must park on anincline, follow the steps below tohelp prevent the vehicle and trailerfrom rolling and possibly injuringsomeone.

Turn the front wheels toward thecurb on a downhill, and away fromthe curb on an uphill.

With the foot brake fully pressed,have someone place wheel chockson the downhill side of the vehicleand trailer wheels.

Firmly apply the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle fromputting pressure on the parkingmechanism in the transmission. Italso makes it easier to move theshift lever out of Park when youwant to drive away.

When parking on level ground,follow all normal precautions (seepage ) including putting thetransmission in Park, and firmlysetting the parking brake.

If the vehicle’s tires slip whenretrieving a boat from the water,shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4lock (see page ). DisengageVTM-4 lock as soon as the boat isout of the water to prevent damageto the VTM-4 system.

1.

2.

3.

206

203bottom

Backing Up

Parking

Retrieving a Boat

Towing a Trailer

226

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance and four-wheel drive VTM-4 system allow youto occasionally travel on unpavedroads and surfaces. Your vehicle isnot designed for trailblazing,mountain climbing, or otherchallenging off-road activities.

If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. Be sure to pay extraattention to the precautions and tipsin this section, and get acquaintedwith your vehicle before leaving thepavement.

General Information

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Driving

227

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off-pavement cancause an accident or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.

Follow all instructions andguidelines in this owner’smanual.Keep your speed low, anddon’t drive faster thanconditions permit.

Before you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service, and inspect your vehiclefor any problems. Pay specialattention to the condition of the tires,and check the tire pressures.

After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressures.

The route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).

Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

To avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.

Be sure to store cargo properlyand do not exceed your cargo loadlimits (see page and ).

Be aware that a heavy load canreduce ground clearance and yourability to clear obstacles.

Whenever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

Keep your speed low, and nevergo faster than the conditions allow.

It’s up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

187 212

Check Out Your VehicleRememberImportant Safety Precautions


228

For better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway, and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with theshift lever in second (2) gear willhelp you have a smoother start onsnow or ice.

Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’the brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

Your vehicle is not equipped withundercarriage guards to protect keycomponents, so take care to avoidrocks, tree stumps, and otherobstacles in your path.

Because your vehicle has a highercenter of gravity than a conventionalpassenger vehicle, driving a wheelover a tall object, or allowing a wheelto drop into a deep hole, can causeyour vehicle to tip or roll over.

If you can’t clearly see all conditionsor obstacles on a slope, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don’tdo it. Find another route.

If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue,

. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

do not try toturn around

Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles Driving on Slopes


Driving

229

The banks and surface under thewater provide good traction. Thewater may hide hazards such asrocks, holes, or mud.

Before driving through water, stop,get out if necessary, and make surethat:

If you decide it is safe to drivethrough water, choose a suitablespeed, and proceed without shifting,changing speeds, stopping, orshutting off the engine.

Do not try to cross water at highspeeds, as this may cause severedamage to the cooling system orresult in loss of control.

After driving through water, testyour brakes. If they got wet, gently‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowlyuntil they operate normally.

If the water is deeper than the wheelhubs, some additional service maybe required. This service is notcovered by your warranties.

The water is not flowing too fast.Deep rushing water can sweep youdownstream. Even very shallowrushing water can wash theground from under your tires andcause you to lose traction andpossibly roll over.

The banks are sloped so you candrive out.

The water is not deep enough tocover your wheel hubs, axles, orexhaust pipe. You could stall andnot be able to restart your engine.The water can also damageimportant vehicle components.

If you get stuck, and cannot getunstuck with the VTM-4 system,engage the VTM-4 Lock (see page

), and carefully try to go in thedirection (forward or reverse) thatyou think will get you unstuck. Donot spin the tires at high speeds. Itwill not help you get out and maycause damage to the transmission orVTM-4 system.

If you are still unable to free yourself,your vehicle is equipped with frontand rear tow hooks designed for thispurpose (see page ).297

203

If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream


230

Use a nylon strap to attach yourvehicle to the recovery vehicle, andcarefully take out the slack in thestrap. Once the strap is tight, therecovery vehicle should apply force.Remember that the recovery vehicleneeds good traction to avoidbecoming stuck, too.

You should never use a jack to try toget unstuck. Your vehicle couldeasily slip off the jack and hurt youor someone else.

You may safely tow a trailer off-roadif you follow these guidelines:

Do not exceed the trailer weightor tongue limits (see page ).

Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,and avoid driving in hilly terrain.

Allow extra room for starting,stopping, and turning.

Slow down if you encounter bumpsor other obstacles.

214

Towing a Trailer Off-Road


Driving

231

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, amaintenance record, and instructionsfor simple maintenance tasks youmay want to take care of yourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 234....................Maintenance Minder . 235....................Maintenance Record . 243

..............................Fluid Locations . 245........................Adding Engine Oil . 246

Changing the Engine Oil and...........................................Filter . 247

..............................Engine Coolant . 249....................Windshield Washers . 250

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 251.................Rear Differential Fluid . 252

.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 253....................................Brake Fluid . 253

....................Power Steering Fluid . 254....................................Timing Belt . 254

.............................................Lights . 255................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 261

.....................................Floor Mats . 261..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 262

.................................Wiper Blades . 262...........................................Wheels . 264

...............................................Tires . 265...................Checking the Battery . 270

.............................Vehicle Storage . 272

315

Maintenance

Maintenance

233

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Maintenance Safety


Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

Injury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

234

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the engine oil lifedisplay according to the table shownbelow.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealer doengine oil replacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and press the SELECTbutton repeatedly until the engine oillife display appears (see page ).70

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance

235


ENGINE OIL LIFEDISPLAY

The maintenance item code(s)indicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

If the engine oil life is 15 percent orless, you will see ‘‘SERVICE dUESOON’’ message in the informationdisplay every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayedbelow the message.

When the remaining engine oil life isless than 5 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE dUE NOW’’ messagealong with the same maintenanceitem code(s), every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

The message changes betweenSERVICE and dUE SOONrepeatedly.

The message changes betweenSERVICE and dUE NOW repeatedly.

242

Maintenance Minder

236

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODES

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS MAINTENANCE ITEM CODES

MESSAGE MESSAGE

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

237

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, you will see ‘‘SERVICEPAST dUE’’ message every time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

The message changes betweenSERVICE and PAST dUE repeatedly.

If you still do not perform theindicated maintenance, you will see anegative mileage, for example ‘‘34MI (54 KM)’’ with the message‘‘PAST dUE.’’ This negative mileagemeans that you should haveperformed the indicatedmaintenance 34 miles (54kilometers) ago. Immediately havethe indicated maintenanceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on page .238

CONTINUED

NEGATIVE MILEAGE

U.S.

Canada

NEGATIVE MILEAGE

You can change the display to theengine oil life display, or theodometer and trip meter by pushingthe SELECT button on theinstrument panel.

All maintenance items displayed inthe trip meter are in code. For anexplanation of these maintenancecodes, see page .

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Press the SELECT buttonrepeatedly until the engine oil lifedisplay or the service message isdisplayed.


1.

2.242

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Minder

238

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS

＞＞

＞＞

＞Press the RESET button for about10 seconds. You will see a‘‘MAINT RESET’’ message.

Select the appropriate answer,‘‘MAINT RESET N’’ (NO) or‘‘MAINT RESET Y’’ (YES) bypressing the SELECT button.‘‘ N’’ or ‘‘ Y’’ is displayed on theoutside temperature display.

Select the ‘‘MAINT RESET Y’’(YES), and press and hold theRESET button again to reset theengine oil life to ‘‘100.’’

3. 4. 5.

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

239

YES is shown.NO is shown.

＃

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions Maintenance, replacement, or

repair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

240

－

－

－

－

－

－You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

182

182

251

253

265

255

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance

241

＊

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

242

:

Maintenance Sub ItemsReplace dust and pollen filter

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission and transfer fluid

Replace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

Inspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolantReplace VTM-4 rear differential fluid

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

2

3

4

5

SymbolAB

Symbol12

Symbol

6

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds ortrailer towing results in higher transmission and transfertemperatures or frequently fully loaded. This requirestransmission and transfer fluid changes more frequentlythan recommended by the Maintenance Minder.If you regulary drive your vehicle under these conditions, havethe transmission and transfer fluid changed every 30,000 miles(48,000 km).

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F,43°C), in very low temperatures (under-20°F, -29°C), or towing atrailer, replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada)

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds ortrailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stressto fluid or frequently fully loaded. This requires differential fluidchanges more frequently than recommended by theMaintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle underthese conditions, have the differential fluid changed at7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

1

1

If the message ‘‚SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,replace the brake fluid every 3 years.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

NOTE:

1 :

240

Main

tenance

Min

der

CONTINUED

Maintenance Record

Maintenance

243

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

Maintenance Record

244

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

＊

＊

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

245

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

RADIATOR CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP: Under the gray cover

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.Unscrew and remove the engine oil

fill cap on the valve cover. Pour inthe oil slowly and carefully so you donot spill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Reinstall the engineoil fill cap, and tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes, and recheck theoil level on the engine oil dipstick.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

246

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the odometerand trip meter display. The oil andfilter collect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Engine Oil andFilter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

247

WASHER DRAIN BOLT

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

9.

8.

7.

6.

4.

5.

3.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

248

OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

249

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

The washer level indicator will comeon when the level is low (see page

).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

3.

4.

5.1.

2.

65

Windshield Washers

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

250

CONTINUED

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

251

DIPSTICK

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator fan comes on, then shut off the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds

wait longer than 90 seconds. before going to step 2, but do not

The rear differential should bedrained and refilled with new fluidwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. This servicemay be needed more often undercertain driving conditions (see page

).

Always use Honda VTM-4Differential Fluid, and have yourdealer replace the rear differentialfluid.

Insert the dipstick all the way backin the transmission.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug, thenadd the fluid into the hole to bringit to the level between the upperand lower marks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). If it’snot available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 by your dealeras soon as it is convenient.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

6.5.

242

Automatic transmission Fluid, Rear Differential Fluid

Rear Differential Fluid

252

The transfer assembly should bedrained and refilled with new fluidwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display.

Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 orGL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or80W-90, and have your dealerreplace the transfer assembly fluid.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoir monthly.Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation in themaintenance minder schedule.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Brake FluidTransfer Assembly Fluid

Transfer Assembly Fluid, Brake Fluid

Maintenance

253

MAX

MIN

－－

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance minder schedule.

Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your vehicle in one ormore of these conditions:

Remove the cover, then check thelevel on the side of the reservoirwhen the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark, and put thecover back in place.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).Towing a trailer.

Timing BeltPower Steering Fluid

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

254

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

COVER

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way, and remove the bulb.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items on thepickup bed or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or other qualified mechanic.

1.

2.

3.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

255

WEATHER SEAL

CONNECTOR HOLD-DOWN WIRE

BULBHalogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Install the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

Install the rubber weather sealover the back of the headlightassembly. Make sure it is rightside up.

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely. Turn on theheadlights to test the new bulb.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Hazard/Parking Light Bulb

256

HOLDING CLIPS

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.

Drop open the tailgate.

Remove the two bolts, and removethe rear light assembly from therear pillar.

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: brake/taillight, turn signal/hazard light,or back-up light.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

5.

6.

7.

CONTINUED

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Maintenance

257

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Push the socket into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Install the rear light assembly inthe rear pillar. Tighten the twobolts securely.

Place a cloth on the edge of thelens segment. Remove each lenssegment by carefully prying on itsedge with a small flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Remove the three mountingscrews from the light assembly.

Remove the screw under each lens.

Pull the high-mount brake lightassembly out of the vehicle.

Remove the lens from the lightassembly.


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

6.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

258

LENS SEGMENT

Put the lens back on the lightassembly, and tighten themounting bolts securely.


Put the light assembly back intothe vehicle. Install the screws andtighten them securely.Reinstall the lens segments.

Remove the license plate lightassembly by pulling it towards you,and then pulling the front edgeupward.



Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

1.

2.

3.

4.

7.

8.

9.

CONTINUED

Lights

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

Maintenance

259



Remove the mounting screw fromthe bed light assembly.

Pull out the light assembly.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.


Reinstall the light assembly in thebumper.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

5.

6.

Lights

Replacing a Bed Light Bulb

260

Reinstall the light assembly.

Reinstall the mounting screw, andtighten it securely.


Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over floor mat anchors.This keeps the floor mats fromsliding forward or backward andpossibly interfering with the pedalsor making the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

6.

7.

8.

CONTINUED

Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Maintenance

261

LOOP

A non-Honda floor mat may not fityour vehicle properly. This couldprevent the proper operation of thefolding rear seats and the passenger’sseat weight sensors. We recommendusing genuine Honda floor mats. Donot put additional floor mats on topof the anchored mats.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace this filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the air flowfrom the heating and coolingsystem/climate control systembecomes less than usual.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a wiper blade:

To raise the wiper arm, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and activate the wipers(see page ). When the wipersare in the upright position, turnthe ignition switch off to stop thewipers in that position.

1.

75

Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper Blades

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades

262

CONTINUED

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull up firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

2. 3. 4.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

263

LOCK TAB

WIPER ARMS BLADE

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the wiper arms.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm against thewindow.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and turn the wiperswitch off to return the wiper armsto the parked position.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keepsthe aluminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheelswith harsh chemicals (includingsome commercial wheel cleaners)or a stiff brush can damage theclear-coat. To clean the wheels,use a mild detergent and a softbrush or sponge.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

6.

7.

5.

8.

9.

If equipped

Wheels

Wiper Blades, Wheels

264

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on page .

204

266

CONTINUED

Inflation Guidelines

Tires

Maintenance

265

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

306

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Compact Spare

Front/Rear:

Tires

Tire Inspection

Recommended Tire Pressures

266

P245/65R17 105S 32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa ,4.2 kgf/cm )T165/90R17 105M

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display. Move thetires to the positions shown in thediagram each time they are rotated.If you purchase directional tires,rotate only front-to-back.

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance

267

Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s wheels. Use only Hondawheel weights f or balancing.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work on that tire.

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system toactivate.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

268

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

＃

＋

＊

＊

Wheels:

Tires:

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires. Do not use chains on therear tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, we strongly recommendusing this Quality Chain Corp. tirechain:

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snow tireson all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Rubber chain adjusters, ortensioners, must be used toprevent the chains fromcontacting the body or the chassis.

This tire chain is available at manyauto supply stores. To find a localstore that carries the chain, callQuality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824.To order the tire chain online, go to

, and enter yourvehicle information. When you installthe chains, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions, and mount them astightly as you can. Drive slowly withthe chains installed.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

304

306 www.chainquest.com

CONTINUED

Tires

Wheel and Tire Specifications Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Premium Cobra Cable Chain1046P with accessory

adjusters

Winter Driving

Maintenance

269

17 x 7 1/2 J

P245/65R17 105S

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

If you ever hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stopand investigate. If the chains haveloosened, retighten them. Make surethey do not contact the brake linesor suspension.

Remove the chains as soon as youbegin driving on cleared roads.

Tires, Checking the Battery

Checking the Battery

270

TEST INDICATOR WINDOWUsing the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

－

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio you willsee ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency display.Use the preset bars to enter the code(see page ).

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

162


Checking the Battery

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Maintenance

271

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all door,In-Bed Trunk lid, and tailgate seals.Also, apply a vehicle body wax tothe painted surfaces that matewith the door, In-Bed Trunk lidand tailgate seals.

Vehicle Storage

272

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 274....................Changing a Flat Tire . 275

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 283................................Jump Starting . 284

..............If the Engine Overheats . 286.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 288..........Charging System Indicator . 288

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 289...............Brake System Indicator . 290

..............................................Fuses . 291..............................Fuse Locations . 294

......................Emergency Towing . 296..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 297

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

273

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Do not mount snow chains on acompact spare.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Driving with the compact sparetire may activate the TPMS (seepage ). The TPMS does notmonitor compact spare tirepressure.

205

Compact Spare Tire

274

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake.If you are towing a trailer, unhitchit.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

If you tow a trailer frequently, werecommend that you use a regulartire as a spare. You can store theregular size spare tire on the tire tray,but store the tool kit at the side ofthe In-Bed Trunk (see page ),and secure it.

2.1.

281CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

275

TOOL BOX

SPARE TIRE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Open the In-Bed Trunk.

Remove the two tire tray holdingbolts.

Pull out the tire tray with thehandle, and hook the rear of thetire tray to the guides on the backedge of the In-Bed Trunk.

Unfasten the strap to remove thetool box, and unscrew the wingbolt.

Take out the compact spare tire.If you are using a cargo net or acargo cover in the In-Bed Trunk,remove it before pulling out the tiretray.

4.

3. 5. 6.

7.


276

TIRE TRAY HOLDING BOLTS

WING BOLT

TOOL BOXTIRETRAY STRAP

CONTINUED

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange.

Turn the dial at the bottom of thejack clockwise until the top of thejack contacts the jacking point.Make sure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

8. 9. 10.


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

277

JACKING POINT DIAL

Attach the stay to the extension,then attach the wheel nut wrenchto the end of the extension.

Turn the jack dial (wheel nutwrench) clockwise as shown toraise the vehicle until the flat tireis off the ground.

Make sure the stay, the extension,and the wheel nut wrench aresecurely attached.

Insert the hook at the end of thestay into the opening on the dial atthe bottom of the jack.

11. 12. 13.


278

EXTENSION

CONNECTOR BUTTON

DIAL

CONNECTOR BUTTON WHEEL NUT WRENCH

HOOK

STAY

CONTINUED

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Remove the wheel nuts and thewheel cap (on RT and CanadianLX models) then remove the flattire. Handle the wheel nutscarefully; they may be hot fromdriving. Place the flat tire on theground with the outside surfacefacing up.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

The wheel cap cannot be removedwithout first removing the wheelnuts.

14. 15.

16.

17.

On RT and Canadian LX models


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

279

BRAKE HUB

WHEEL CAP

RT/LX model is shown.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face up on thetire tray.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Release the tire tray and slide itback in place.

Tighten the tire tray holding boltssecurely.

Remove the center cap from theflat tire.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

On RTX, RTS, RTL, and CanadianEXL models


280

WING BOLT

SPACER CONEFor normaltire

For sparetire

94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)

Store the wheel cap or center capin the In-Bed Trunk. Make sure itdoes not get scratched ordamaged.

Refer to(see page ).

When storing the flat tire, placethe tool box at the right side of theIn-Bed Trunk as shown.

Store the jack and the tools in thetool box.

25.

26.

27.

28.205

Changing a Tire withTPMS


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

281

TOOL BOX

Loose items can be thrown outof the vehicle in a crash andcould seriously injure theoccupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

As a temporary mounting location,you can secure a spare tire on thepickup bed, if needed.

Place the spare tire on the pickupbed as shown.

Place the spacer cone in the wheelhub, and secure the spare tire tothe pickup bed with the wing bolt.

If you remove the spare tire from thepickup bed, reinstall the clip backinto its hole.

Remove the clip by pushing thecenter of its top.

Remove the spare tire from thetire tray (see page ).

Store or secure the tool box.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.276


Securing a Spare Tire on thePickup Bed

282

SPACER CONE

WING BOLT

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

Check these things:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

81

284

296

270

284

CONTINUED

Jump Starting The Starter Operates Normally

Emergency Towing

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

If the Engine Won’t Start

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

283

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

Turn off all electrical accessories:heater, A/C, climate control, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in Park, and set theparking brake.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

1.

2.

196

291

296

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

284

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

－

＋

＋

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourvehicle’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

4.

6.

7.

5.

3.

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

285

BOOSTERBATTERY

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.If it climbs to the red mark, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

1.

2.

3.

If the Engine Overheats

286

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature to maximum heat(climate control to AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.10.

11.

9.

296

296

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

287

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

182

246

296

Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator

Emergency Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

288

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator could come ondue to a loose or missing fuel fill cap.You will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay. Tighten the cap until it clicksat least once. Tightening the cap willnot turn the indicator turn offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

The indicator may also come on withthe ‘‘D’’ indicator.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes are erased. It can takeseveral days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation (see page ).310Readiness Codes

StateEmissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

289

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, and as a reminderto check the parking brake. It willstay on if you do not fully release theparking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

253

296Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

290

CanadaU.S.

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The primary under-hood fuse box ison the passenger’s side. Thesecondary fuse box is next to thebrake fluid reservoir. To open them,push the tabs as shown.

The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, put your finger inthe notch on the lid, and pull itoutward slightly, then pull it towardyou and take it out of its hinges.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, check for ablown fuse first. Determine from thechart on pages and , or thediagram on the fuse box lid, whichfuse or fuses control that device.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.

294 295

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

291

UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)INTERIOR

NOTCH

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse boxes and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the sidewindow at the wire inside.Removing these fuses requires aPhillips-head screwdriver.Remove the cover from the fuse

box.

4.3.1.

2

Fuses

292

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER

BLOWNFUSE

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO function of thedriver’s window will be disabled. Toreset the AUTO function, see page

.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace the fusewith one of the spare fuses of thesame rating or lower.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset bars to enterthe code (see page ).

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

5.

6.

106

162

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

293

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the properrating f or the circuit, install one witha lower rating.

－

－

－

＋

－

－＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equipped

123456789

101112

123456

13141516171819202122

23

If equipped

789

1011

10 A

10 A15 A10 A10 A7.5 A15 A15 A

15 A7.5 A

Horn, StopDefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardOption 1Not UsedCooling FanCondenser FanHeater MotorSeatBattery

B IGI MainPower WindowSpare Fuses

20 A20 A40 A15 A40 A

30 A30 A40 A40 A

120 A50 A50 A

(7.5 A)20 A40 A20 A15 A

(20 A)

(20 A)(7.5 A)(20 A)7.5 A

(20 A)

Back LightVSA FSRVSA MTRVTM-4Front Accessory SocketsElectric Brake

Small LightsStop/Turn LightsChargeTPMSMoonroof

Left Headlight Low BeamNot UsedLeft Headlight High BeamSmall LightsRight Headlight High BeamRight Headlight Low BeamBack UpFI ECU (PCM)DBWNot UsedHeated SeatMG Clutch

:

:

No.

No.

No.

No.

Amps. Circuits ProtectedAmps.

Amps. Amps.Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

24 28

Fuse Locations

294

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

－－

－

－

＊＊＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

No. No. Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected123456789

1011121314151617

If equipped

18192021222324252627282930313233

15 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

(7.5 A)

7.5 A15 A

(10 A)15 A20 A10 A7.5 A20 A10 A7.5 A30 A

(10 A)(20 A)

(20 A)

Bed LightsIG CoilDaytime Running LightLAFRadioInterior LightsBack UpDoor LockRear Accessory SocketOPDSIG, WiperNot Used

Not Used

Not Used

IG ACGIG Fuel PumpIG WasherIG MeterIG SRSIGPLeft Rear WindowRight Rear WindowPassenger’s WindowBack WindowDriver’s WindowNot UsedIG HACIG VSA/ABSACCNot Used

::Canadian models

Driver’s Power Seat LumbarDriver’s Power Seat Sliding

Driver’s Power Seat Reclining

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

295

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with all four wheels on theground, do the following:

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D for several seconds,then to N.Turn off the engine.

With all four wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

Emergency Towing

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

296

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must betransported with the all f our wheels of fthe ground.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

Towing your vehicle with two tires onthe ground will damage parts of the4WD system. It should be transportedon a f lat-bed truck or trailer.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see the previous page).

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thetie down hooks on the lower left ofthe front and rear bumpers.

CONTINUED

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

297

FRONT

REARTIE DOWNHOOK

TIE DOWNHOOK

‘‘Rocking’’ your vehicle betweenf orward and reverse gear or revving upthe engine and allowing the wheels tospin f reely at high speeds can damagethe automatic transmission. Use a towservice to prevent transmission damage.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

298

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe tie down hooks f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. These hooks should not be usedf or open-road towing.

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 300................................Specifications . 302

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 304

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 304.................................Treadwear . 304

......................................Traction . 304.............................Temperature . 305

.................................Tire Labeling . 306

.......................Emissions Controls . 307.....................The Clean Air Act . 307

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 307

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 307

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 307

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 308....................PGM-FI System . 308

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 308

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 308

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 308

....................Replacement Parts . 308..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 309

..............State Emissions Testing . 310

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

299

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

300

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

301

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－－＊

＊

＊

＊＊

Specifications

302

CapacitiesDimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

1.64 US gal (6.2 )2.14 US gal (8.1 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )3.3 US qt (3.1 )8.5 US qt (8.0 )

206.7 in (5,250 mm)78.0 in (1,980 mm)70.3 in (1,785 mm)

2.79 US qt (2.64 )3.01 US qt (2.85 )

0.45 US qt (0.43 )0.48 US qt (0.45 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidReardifferentialfluidTransferassemblyfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

122.0 in (3,100 mm)67.1 in (1,705 mm)66.9 in (1,700 mm)

22.01 US gal (83.3 )

See the tire information labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb.

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)Maximum load limit(Payload)

The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305meters) of elevation.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

HFC-134a (R-134a)21.2 22.9 oz (600 650 g)

ND-OIL8

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)

1 :

2 :3 :

On vehicles without moonroof or navigation system

1,530 lbs (690 kg)1,480 lbs (670 kg)

On vehicles with moonroof and navigation system

1

1

2

2

3

－－

－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

303

Fuses

Battery

Engine

Alignment

Tires

Lights

60/55 W (HB2)12 V12 V 28/8 W

12 V 21 W12 V 21/5 W12 V 18 W12 V 3 CP12 V 3 CP12 V12 V

8 W5 W

12 V 3 CP12 V 1.4 W

Interior

Under-hood

Capacity

12 V12 V

3.8 W2 W

12 V 3.4 W

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )

10.0 : 1IZFR5K-11SKJ16DR-M11

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

0°50’0°50’

1°53’

P245/65R17 105ST165/90R17 105M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

HeadlightsFront turn signal/Parking/Hazard lightsRear turn signal/hazard lightsBrake/TaillightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightsIndividual map lights

Bed lightsConsole compartment lightGlove box lightVanity mirror lightDoor courtesy lights

12 V 72 AH/20 HR12 V 60 AH/5 HR

See page 295 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox lid under the dashboard.See page 294 or the fuse box lid.

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

FrontRear

NGK:DENSO:

High/Low

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC,V6 gasoline engine

－The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

304

－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. TheGrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, C

TechnicalInform

ation

305

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following exampleTIN. TIN is located on the sidewallof the tire.

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire width in millimeters.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

Max Press

Max Load The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Below is an example oftire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

R

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

65

245

P

17

105

S

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

306

P245/65R17 105S

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

Emissions Controls

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

TechnicalInform

ation

307

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

308

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

309

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTICCONVERTERS

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use the cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving the

accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Stop the vehicle, turn off theignition switch, and leave it off for30 minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

310

Customer Service................................Information . 312

....................Warranty Coverages . 313Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 314.....................Authorized Manuals . 315

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

311

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle identification number (seepage )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, andtelephone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

300

Customer Service Information

312

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7098

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2007 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2007 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

313

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to: Administrator, NHTSA,400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590. You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

314

－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００７

ＨＯＮ

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

315

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Price

Each

$70.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

Form Description

2006-07 Honda Ridgeline

Service Manual Base Book


Electrical Troubleshooting Manual


Body Repair Manual

2007 Honda Ridgeline

Owner’s Manual

2007 Honda Ridgeline

Quick Start Guide

2007 Ridgeline Honda Service History

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SJC01

61SJC01EL

61SJC30

31SJC611

31SJC800

31SJCQ10

31SJCM10

HON-R

2007 Honda Ridgeline Navigation Manual

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

316

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 184ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 82............Accessory Power Sockets . 116

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 247........Adjusting the Steering wheel . 79

...........................Advanced Airbags . 25.....................................Airbag (SRS) . 9

..............Air Conditioning System . 122.........................................Usage . 123

...............Air Outlets (Vents) . 124, 129

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 266......................................Antifreeze . 249

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 63, 208

...................................Operation . 208..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 162

.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 82........................................Armrests . 101

................Audio System . 133, 142, 159.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 84

Automatic Heated Wiper......................................Zone . 76, 127

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19

.............Automatic Speed Control . 165..............Automatic Transmission . 197

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 302...............Checking Fluid Level . 251

.......................................Shifting . 197Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 197................Shift Lever Positions . 198

....................Shift Lock Release . 202......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 161

Back Window.......................................Indicator . 69...................................Operation . 105

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 288............................Jump Starting . 284

..............................Maintenance . 270............................Specifications . 303

Bed Lights.......................................Indicator . 69...................................Operation . 120

..............................Before Driving . 177

....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 19.........................Beverage Holders . 114

..................................Booster Seats . 50Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 208.............Break-in, New Linings . 178

...........................................Fluid . 253............Bulb Replacement . 257, 258

.......................................Parking . 109.................System Indicator . 63, 290........................Wear Indicators . 207

.............................Braking System . 207.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 178

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 78........................Brights, Headlights . 76

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 58

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 257

..............................Brake Lights . 257.................................Bed Lights . 260

Front Turn Signal /Parking/.......................Hazard Lights . 256

.................................Headlights . 255.........High-mount Brake Light . 258

.................License Plate Lights . 259Rear Bulbs (Brake/Taillights,

Turn Signal/Hazard Lights,................Back-up Lights) . 257

............................Specifications . 303..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 255

............................Capacities Chart . 302.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53

...........................Cargo Hooks . 97, 114.............................Carrying Cargo . 186

.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii.........................................CD Care . 161

..........................CD Changer . 152, 153CD Player/Changer Error

...................................Messages . 162

.......................................CD Player . 151........................Certification Label . 300

....................................Chains, tire . 269Change Oil

........................................How to . 247......................................When to . 235

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 275...Charging System Indicator . 62, 288

............Checklist, Before Driving . 195..................Childproof Door Locks . 84

.....................................Child Safety . 32..............................Booster Seats . 50

...................................Child Seats . 39.....Important Safety Reminders . 32

..........................................Infants . 37..........................Larger Children . 49

.........................................LATCH . 41......................Risks with Airbags . 33

.............................Small Children . 38....................................Tether . 41, 46

.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 33.......................................Child Seats . 39

.........................................LATCH . 41..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46

...............Climate Control System . 122..............................................Clock . 163

....................................Coat Hooks . 115.....................Code, Audio System . 162

........................CO in the Exhaust . 307......................Compact Spare Tire . 274

.........................................Compass . 168.................Console Compartment . 113.................Consumer Information . 312

.............Controls, Instruments and . 57Coolant

........................................Adding . 249....................................Checking . 182

.........................Proper Solution . 249...................Temperature Gauge . 72

..............................Courtesy Light . 118Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 307Cruise Control

.......................................Indicator . 65...................................Operation . 165...................................Cup Holders . 114

.............Customer Service Office . 312

Index

C

D

II

＊

＊

CONTINUED

...................................Fan, Interior . 123.........................................Features . 121

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 179Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 262...............................................Oil . 248

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 79...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 275

..............................Economy, Fuel . 183..................................Emergencies . 273

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 284...........Brake System Indicator . 290

................Changing a Flat Tire . 275.....Charging System Indicator . 288

..................Checking the Fuses . 291.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 79.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 288...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 289

..................Overheated Engine . 286............................Stuck Vehicle . 297

.......................................Towing . 296.........................Emergency Brake . 109.......................Emissions Controls . 307

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 72

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 62, 289

.........................Oil Life Display . 235........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 288

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 246...............................Overheating . 286

............................Specifications . 303

............................Speed Limiter . 201.......................................Starting . 196

.................Engine, if it won’t start . 283Evaporative Emissions Control

........................................System . 307...............................Exhaust Fumes . 53

Exhaust Gas Recirculation........................................System . 308

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 16

................Daytime Running Lights . 78.................................Dead Battery . 284

.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 314..............Defrosting the Windows . 127

................Differential Fluid, Rear . 252....................................Dimensions . 302

...............Dimming the Headlights . 76Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 251..................................Engine Oil . 182

..........................Directional Signals . 76........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 207

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 248.Door and Tailgate Open Monitor . 64

Doors..Locking and Unlocking . 83, 84, 86

....................Lockout Prevention . 83......................Power Door Locks . 83

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 304...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 193....................................Economy . 183

...................................................D3 . 199Dual-Action Tailgate

.................................Indicator . 64, 94.....................................Operation . 92

..........Dual Temperature Control . 130..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 262

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III

＊＊

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 300

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 183Gasoline

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 65...........................................Gauge . 71

................Octane Requirement . 178........................Tank, Filling the . 179

................Gas Station Procedures . 179Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 72...............................................Fuel . 71

...............................Speedometer . 70.................................Tachometer . 70

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight.......................................Rating) . 213

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight.......................................Rating) . 213

............Gearshift Lever Positions . 198......................................Glove Box . 115

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight.......................................Rating) . 213

.....................................Floor Mats . 261Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 251..........................................Brake . 253

..........................Power Steering . 254.......................Rear Differential . 252

...................Transfer Assembly . 253..................Windshield Washer . 250

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 140

.................Folding the Rear Seats . 103..........................Four-way Flashers . 79

........................................Front Seat . 98..............................Adjusting . 98, 100

.........................................Airbags . 23

.......................................Heaters . 104.................................................Fuel . 178

......................Fill Door and Cap . 179...........................................Gauge . 71

................Octane Requirement . 178...............................Oxygenated . 178

........................Reserve Indicator . 65........................Tank, Filling the . 179

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 291

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 255

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 79.................................Headlights . 75, 76

........................................Aiming . 255..............Automatic Lighting Off . 77

.................................Control Dial . 76.......Daytime Running Lights . 78

..................High Beam Indicator . 65.....High Beams, Turning on . 75, 76............Low Beams, Turning on . 76

.........................Reminder Chime . 77........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 255

..................................Turning On . 76............................Head Restraints . 102.............................Heated Mirrors . 111

...............................Heaters, Seats . 104.....................Heating and Cooling . 123

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 75HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 171.......................Hood, Opening the . 181

..................................................Horn . 74

Index

G

HI

IV

＊＊

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 80

.......................Label, Certification . 300.................Lane Change, Signaling . 76

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19...........................Light Control Dial . 76

Ignition..............................................Keys . 80

...........................................Switch . 82............Timing Control System . 308

........................Immobilizer System . 81.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

...................................In-Bed Trunk . 95....................Emergency Opener . 96

............................Open Indicator . 69.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 59

...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 63.......................A/T Temperature . 66

....................Back Window Open . 69.............................Bed Lights On . 69

Brake (Parking and Brake....................................System) . 63

........................Charging System . 62.............................Cruise Control . 65

...................................Door Open . 64DRL (Daytime Running

..................................Lights) . 65...................................High Beam . 65

....................In-Bed Trunk Open . 69........Key (Immobilizer System) . 63

.....................................Lights On . 66......................................Low Fuel . 65

........................Low Oil Pressure . 62......................Low Tire Pressure . 68

..................Maintenance Minder . 67Malfunction Indicator Lamp

.......................................(MIL) . 62...........................Side Airbag Off . 62

.......................................Seat Belt . 61...............................................SRS . 62

..............................Tailgate Open . 64...............Tire Pressure Monitor . 68

.............................TPMS System . 68Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 64............................VSA Activation . 67

.................................VSA System . 67..........................................VTM-4 . 66

..............................Washer Level . 65..................Individual Map Lights . 119

...............................Infant Restraint . 37......................................Infant Seats . 37

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 266........................Information Display . 70

.........Engine Oil Life Indicator . 235...........Maintenance Items . 238, 242

.................................Inside Mirror . 110.............................Inspection, Tire . 266

........................Instrument Panel . 3, 58........Instrument Panel Brightness . 78

...............................Interior Lights . 118........................................Introduction . i

................Jacking Up the Vehicle . 277.......................................Jack, Tire . 275

................................Jump Starting . 284

Index

J

L

K

IND

EX

V

..................................Maintenance . 233Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 241

.................................Record . 243-244................................Minder . 235-242

.........................Minder Indicator . 67..........................................Safety . 234

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 289..............Manual Seat Adjustments . 98

...............................Meters, Gauges . 70........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 111

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 185.......................................Moonroof . 108

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 178.........................................Odometer . 70

....................Off-Highway Driving . 227...................Off-Road Precautions . 228

Oil........................Change, How to . 247

......................Change, When to . 235

......................Checking Engine . 182...........................................Filter . 247

..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 288Selecting Proper Viscosity

......................................Chart . 246...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 82

............................Outside Mirrors . 111....................Overheating, Engine . 286

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 241.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 178

..............Panel Brightness Control . 78........................Park Gear Position . 198

...........................................Parking . 206...............................Parking Brake . 109.................................Parking Lights . 76

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 309.............................PGM-FI System . 308

Pickup Bed.........................Carrying Cargo . 189

.........................................Lights . 120..............Power Seat Adjustments . 100...............Power Socket Locations . 116

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 255

.......................................Indicator . 66.......................................Interior . 118.........................................Parking . 76

..................................Turn Signal . 76............................Load Limits . 187, 212

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 82Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 82............................Fuel Fill Door . 179

..................................Glove Box . 115...............................In-Bed Trunk . 95

....................Lockout Prevention . 83.................................Power Door . 83

........................Low Coolant Level . 182.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 65

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 288...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 302

...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 186

...................Neutral Gear Position . 199..................New Vehicle Break-in . 178

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 300

Index

N

O

P

M

VI

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16........................Protecting Children . 32

.....................General Guidelines . 32.......................Protecting Infants . 37

.......Protecting Larger Children . 49.........Protecting Small Children . 38

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 46

.............................Using LATCH . 41

...................Radiator Overheating . 286Radio/CD Sound

.......................System . 133, 142, 148.................Rear Differential Fluid . 252

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 257..........................Rear View Mirror . 110

Rear View Mirror with.....................................Compass . 168

....................Rear (Back) Window . 106.......Reclining the Seat-Backs . 98, 100

................Remote Audio Controls . 161

.......................Remote Transmitter . 89Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 247..........................................Fuses . 291

................................Light Bulbs . 255........................................Minder . 242

................................Timing Belt . 254...........................................Tires . 275

.............................Wiper Blades . 262Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 20...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 182

..................Reverse Gear Position . 198................................Rotation, Tire . 267

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 19.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 314

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 11..........................Head Restraints . 13

.................................Seat Belts . 8, 18...........Seats and Seat-Backs . 11, 12

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 54

..............................Safety Messages . iii.....................Satellite Radio, XM . 142

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18...............Additional Information . 18

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

.....................................Cleaning . 261......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

................................Maintenance . 20Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 18, 61...................System Components . 18

...............Use During Pregnancy . 16...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14

.................................................Seats . 98..............Adjusting the Seat . 98, 100

.............Folding the Rear Seats . 103........................Head Restraints . 102

........................................Heater . 104............................Security System . 164

...............................Serial Number . 300...........................Service Intervals . 242

......Service Manual, Purchasing . 315.........Service Station Procedures . 179

Index

IND

EX

S

R

VII

＊

.....................................Tachometer . 70Tailgate, Dual-Action

.................................Indicator . 64, 94.....................................Operation . 92

......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 257.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 273

Technical Descriptions....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 304.....Emissions Control Systems . 307

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 309

.......................Temperature Gauge . 72...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 19

............................Theft Protection . 162..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 309

....................................Timing Belt . 254

....................................Tire Chains . 269.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 275

.................................Tire Labeling . 306Tire Pressure Monitoring

....................System (TPMS) . 204Low Tire Pressure

...........................Indicator . 68, 204

Shifting the Automatic.............................Transmission . 197

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 197........................Shift Lock Release . 202

....................................Side Airbags . 26......................Side Curtain Airbags . 28

Side Marker (Parking)...Lights, Bulb Replacement in . 256

...............................Signaling Turns . 76.....................................Snow Tires . 269

................Sound System . 133, 142, 148Spare Tire

..............................Inflating . 265, 274....................Specifications . 269, 303

....................Specifications Charts . 302................................Speed Control . 165...................................Speedometer . 70

..........SRS, Additional Information . 21...Additional Safety Precautions . 31

......Airbag System Components . 21.............................Airbag Service . 30

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 23

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 28.............................SRS Indicator . 28, 62

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 82.......................Starting the Engine . 196

................With a Dead Battery . 284..............State Emissions Testing . 310

........Steam Coming from Engine . 286Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 79.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 82

...Stereo Sound System . 133, 142, 148....................Storing Your Vehicle . 272

................................Stuck Vehicle . 297........................................Sun Visor . 117

........................Sunglasses Holder . 115Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)......................................Servicing . 30

.........................SRS Indicator . 28, 62...................System Components . 21

..................................Synthetic Oil . 247

Index

T

VIII

＊＊

＊

CONTINUED

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 273

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 304........................Unleaded Gasoline . 178

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 248

................................Vanity Mirror . 117.........Vehicle Capacity Load . 187, 302

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 302....Vehicle Identification Number . 300

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 210

........VSA System Indicator . 67, 210...VSA Activation Indicator . 67, 210

.........................VSA Off Switch . 211.............................Vehicle Storage . 272

.....................................Ventilation . 125.................................................VIN . 300

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 246

..................................VTM-4 Lock . 203

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 54

..................Warranty Coverages . 313Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 250............................Level Indicator . 65

.....................................Operation . 75...........................................Wheels . 264

...............Adjusting the Steering . 79......................................Wrench . 276

Required Federal............................Explanation . 175

.......Tire Pressure Monitor . 68, 205..................TPMS Indicator . 68, 205

...............................................Tires . 265..............................Air Pressure . 266

.........................Checking Wear . 266..........................Compact Spare . 274

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 304......................................Inflation . 265

..................................Inspection . 266..............................Maintenance . 267

...................................Replacing . 268......................................Rotating . 267

...........................................Snow . 269....................Specifications . 269, 303

................................Tire Chains . 269...................Tools, Tire Changing . 275

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 212

................Emergency Wrecker . 296.................................Equipment . 220

....Equipment and Accessories . 216.............................Weight Limit . 212

.........................Trailer Loading . 214.................Trailer Towing Tips . 220

.............Transfer Assembly Fluid . 253Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 251...........................Fluid Selection . 252

..............Identification Number . 301.............Shifting the Automatic . 197

.....................................Treadwear . 304

.......................................Trip Meter . 71..................................Trunk, In-Bed . 95

....................................Turn Signals . 76

Index

W

V

U

IND

EX

IX

＊

＊

......................XM Satellite Radio . 142

Windows................Operating the Power . 105

Windshield...................................Defroster . 125

.......................................Washers . 75...........Wiper Zone, Heated . 76, 127

Wipers, Windshield.......................Changing Blades . 262

.....................................Operation . 75....................................Worn Tires . 266

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 296

: U.S. only

Index

X

X

Service Information Summary

Gasoline: Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )Front/Rear:

Compact Spare Tire:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

22.01 US gal (83.3 )

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid(see page ).

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosityhypoid gear oil, API serviceclassified GL4 or GL5 only (seepage ).

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

251

254

252

253

246

253

2007 honda ridgeline online reference owner's manual...

Documents